parkdale high school secondary school reform military...

SPECIFICATIONS

for

PARKDALE HIGH SCHOOL SECONDARY SCHOOL REFORM

MILITARY SCIENCE

For Prince George’s County, Maryland

Prince George’s County Public Schools

CD/BID SUBMISSION

4/20/2016

The Lukmire Partnership – Architect Setty and Associates – MEP Engineer

PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, MARYLAND PUBLIC SCHOOLS PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS PARKDALE HIGH SCHOOL MILITARY SCIENCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 02 - 1 4/20/2016

DIVISION 0 CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00 0001 COVER SHEET TLP 00 0002 TABLE OF CONTENTS TLP BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00 010 Construction Bid Solicitation (Draft) PGCPS 00 020 Instructions to Bidders (AIA Document A701-1997) PGCPS 00 030 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders PGCPS 00 040 Bid Form (Draft) PGCPS 00 050 List of Drawings TLP CONTRACTS REQUIREMENTS, FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00 100 Standard Form of Agreement – AIA Document A107-2007 PGCPS 00 200 Supplementary General Provisions PGCPS 00 300 Bid Bond - AIA Document A310-2010 PGCPS 00 310 Payment Bond - AIA Document A312 – 2010 PGCPS 00 310 Performance Bond - AIA Document A312 – 2010 PGCPS 00 451 State of Maryland Anti-Bribery Affidavit PGCPS 00 452 State of Maryland Tax Certification PGCPS 00 500 Insurance Requirements PGCPS 01 210 Allowance Spec PGCPS 01 260 Contract Mod Proc Spec PGCPS 01 270 Unit Prices PGCPS 01 410 Regulatory Requirements PGCPS 01 581 Temp Project Sign Spec / Appendix E PGCPS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY OF WORK TLP 01 2300 ADD ALTERNATES TLP 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES TLP 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES TLP 01 3100 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE TLP 01 3110 PROJECT MEETINGS TLP 01 3200 PROJECT REPORTING AND PHOTOGRAPHS TLP 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES TLP 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS TLP 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS TLP 01 5001 FIELD ENGINEERING TLP 01 5720 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL TLP 01 7000 PROJECT CLOSEOUT TLP 01 7100 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION TLP 01 7200 EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION TLP 01 7300 OPERATIONS MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY MANUALS TLP DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY TLP 06 4023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK TLP DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS TLP DIVISION 8 OPENINGS 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES TLP 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS TLP 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE AA


TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 02 - 2 4/20/2016

08 8000 GLASS AND GLAZING TLP DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS TLP 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES TLP 09 6519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING TLP 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING TLP DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 1100 MARKERBOARDS & TACKBOARDS TLP 10 1423 SIGNAGE TLP DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 5000 EDUCATIONAL EQUIPMENT TLP DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 0000 PGCPS 2013 Wiring Specification PGCPS SEE SHEET E052 SETTY

Office of Purchasing and Supply Service

Facilities Administration Building (FAB) 13300 Old Marlboro Pike, Room 20

Upper Marlboro, MD 20772 Phone: 301-952-6560 Fax: 301-952-6605

Brenda Allen, Director DATE OF ISSUE:

INVITATION FOR BID #:

BID TITLE:

Parkdale High School Secondary School Reform (SSR) – Homeland Security & Military Science

and Global Studies PSCP No. 16.1177.15 & 16.177.16

PRE-BID DATE & TIME:

LOCATION OF PRE BID: PGCPS, Facilities Admin. Bldg. Old Marlboro Pike, Room 17, Upper Marlboro, MD 20772

DATE/TIME OF BID OPENING:

BUYER: Donna Parks, Senior Buyer

Company Name: ________________________________________________________________ RECEIPT OF BID Sealed bids for the requirements set forth herein will be received in the Purchasing Department, Room 20, Board of Education of Prince George’s County (BOARD), 13300 Old Marlboro Pike, Upper Marlboro, MD 20772-9983, before the deadline of ____________________________________. In order to be considered for award, all bids must be received with an original and Three (3) duplicate copies (1) one CD of the bid, including supporting documentation. The bid title and bid number must be stated on the lower left corner of the submission envelope.

All bidders will be fully responsible for the timely delivery of the Bid response to the designated location to include bids hand carried, sent by common carriers, (UPS, Federal Express and the U.S. Postal Service). Bids delivered to any other office or location other than the Purchasing Department prior to bid opening deadline will not be considered. Competitive sealed Bids are publicly opened and available for review except to the extent the bidder designates trade secrets or other proprietary data to be confidential as set forth in this title. Prices, makes, and model or catalog numbers of the items offered, deliveries, and terms of payment shall be publicly available at a reasonable time after bid opening but in any event before contract award regardless of any designation to the contrary at the time of bid opening. MINORITY & LOCAL BUSINESS INITIATIVE

A. The Board is continually seeking to provide services, program enhancements and procurement opportunities to help ensure the success of its qualified local minority and qualified local small businesses. The Board strongly encourages its Contractors to maximize the use of qualified local minority business and qualified local small business enterprises on projects. Prime contractors are encouraged to seek and utilize locally based minority and women-owned subcontractors from within the geographical boundaries of Prince George’s County. To be responsive in the bid submittal, the bidder or proposer shall either maximize the use of qualified local minority business and/or qualified local small business enterprises on each project or be able to verify, through documentation that good faith efforts were engaged to maximize the use of qualified local minority business and/or qualified local small business enterprises. Minority Businesses included in the bid package at time of bid opening, cannot be changed without prior approval of the Director of Purchasing and Supply Services

MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM – PROHIBITIONS State Law HB 389 and SB 611, Prime Contractors are prohibited by law from including a certified MBE in a bid or proposal without requesting, receiving, or obtaining the MBE’s authorization. The contractor must also use the MBE’s services to perform the contract. In addition, the contractor may not pay the MBE solely for the use of its name in the bid or proposal. Prime Contractor may be prosecuted if they fail to comply with the law. The Board is required under the law to report the violation. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid documents may be obtained by: 1. Downloading the document from the Board’s website at: www.pgcps.org. Touch About US, drop down, click on

Administrative Org Chart, under Offices choose Purchasing, then Procurement Opportunities. 2. Choose Purchasing, then Procurement Opportunities. 3. Access through eMaryland Marketplace at https://ebidmarketplace.com 4. Calling the Purchasing Department at 301-952-6560. 5. Visiting the Purchasing Department between the hours of 8:00 AM and 4:30 PM, Monday through Friday, excluding

holidays. The Purchasing Department is located at 13300 Old Marlboro Pike, Room 20, Upper Marlboro, MD 20772-9983.

DRAWINGS Prior to bidding, vendors must obtain a complete copy of the contract drawings and specifications for this project, as designed and required for construction on this project. To download project drawings and specifications please use the following link: https://lukmire.sharefile.com/d‐s6fdc3cd83bd4f279 SCOPE OF WORK The BOARD requests bids for Parkdale High School SSR - Homeland Security & Military Science and Global Studies project. The specifications are contained in the Invitation for Bid. Responses submitted must meet or exceed all requirements. Bid that do not meet or exceed all requirements will be considered non-responsive. All exceptions must be noted. PRE-BID CONFERENCE A Pre-bid conference has been scheduled to address questions and/or aspects of the proposal and to obtain input and/or suggestions from perspective Bidders. There will not be a pre-bid conference for this IFB. SITE VISIT Bidders are welcome to visit the site of the Parkdale High School SSR project located at 6001 Good Luck Rd, Riverdale, MD 20737to gain information as to the conditions under which the work is to be done. Failure to visit the site will not relieve a successful bidder from the necessity of his obligation to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of the Technical Section of this RFP and to complete the contemplated Work for the consideration set forth in his bid. For information pertaining to a site visit, contact the Department of Capital Programs, Mr. Henry Lewis, Project Manager at: [email protected] and check our website for updates. Please do not contact the school directly. INSURANCE The successful Bidder is required to furnish a certificate of insurance. The certificate must be issued to the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY. Bonds issued to the PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.

BID BOND Bidders are required to submit a bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) as determined by the BOARD and specified in the IFB, to ensure the satisfactory completion of the work for which a contract or purchase order is awarded that may exceed 100K. (COMAR 21.06.07.02) The bond must be made in favor of the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR BOND The successful Bidders are required to submit a performance and/or labor bond, Cashier’s or Certified Check in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) as determined by the BOARD and specified in the IFB, of all phases of the contract to ensure the satisfactory completion of the work for which a contract or purchase order is awarded that exceeds $100,000. (COMAR 21.06.07.10) The Board reserves the right to request performance and labor bond for amounts over or under $1,000.00. The bond, cashiers, or certified check must be made in favor of the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES/FAILURE TO PERFORM WORK The successful bidder accepts this contract with the understanding that should they fail to complete the work in an acceptable manner and in the time stated, shall be subject to the payment of liquidated damages as stated in the bid document.

Liquidated Damages Schedule

Amount Amount Per Day

$25,000 and under $100.00

$25,000 - $100,000 $250.00

$100,000- $500,000 $500.00

$500,000- $1,000,000 $550.00

$1,000, 000-$2,500,000 $750.00

$2,500,000-$5,000,000 $1,000.00

$5,000,000-$10,000,000 $1,500.00

$10,000,000-$15,000,000 $2,000.00

$15,000,000 and More $2,500.00 Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs Liquidated Damages Provision for State Funded Contracts Containing

Minority Business Enterprise Participation Goals

“Liquidated Damages”. This contract requires the contractor to make good faith efforts to comply with the Minority Business Enterprise (“MBE”) Program and contract provisions. The State and the Contractor acknowledge and agree that the State will incur damages, including but not limited to loss of goodwill, detrimental impact on economic development, and diversion of internal staff resources, if the Contractor does not make good faith efforts to comply with the requirements of the Page 2 Issued 7/5/13 MBE Program and MBE contract provisions. The parties further acknowledge and agree that the damages the State might reasonably be anticipated to accrue as a result of such lack of compliance are difficult to ascertain with precision. Therefore, upon a determination by the State that the Contractor failed to make good faith efforts to comply with one or more of the specified MBE Program requirements or contract provisions, the Contractor agrees to pay liquidated damages to the State at the rates set forth below. The Contractor expressly agrees that the State may withhold payment on any invoices as a set-off against liquidated damages owed. The Contractor further agrees that for each specified violation, the agreed upon liquidated damages are reasonably proximate to the loss the State is anticipated to incur as a result of such violation.

a. Failure to submit each monthly payment report in full compliance with COMAR 21.11.03.13B (3): $_____ per day until the monthly report is submitted as required.

b. Failure to include in its agreements with MBE subcontractors a provision requiring submission of payment reports in full compliance with COMAR 21.11.03.13B (4): $ ____ per MBE subcontractor.

c. Failure to comply with COMAR 21.11.03.12 in terminating, canceling, or changing the scope of work/value of a contract with an MBE subcontractor and/or amendment of the MBE participation schedule: the difference between the dollar value of the MBE participation commitment on the MBE participation schedule for that specific MBE firm and the dollar value of the work performed by that MBE firm for the contract.

d. Failure to meet the Contractor’s total MBE participation goal and subgoal commitments: the difference between the dollar value of the total MBE participation commitment on the MBE participation schedule and the MBE participation actually achieved.

e. [DO NOT INCLUDE IN CONTRACTS THAT ARE SUBJECT TO SECTION 15-226 OF THE STATE FINANCE AND PROCUREMENT ARTICLE – CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS – PROMPT PAYMENT OF SUBCONTRACTORS].

Failure to promptly pay all undisputed amounts to an MBE subcontractor in full compliance with the prompt payment provisions of this contract: $_____ per day until the undisputed amount due to the MBE subcontractor is paid. Notwithstanding the use of liquidated damages, the State reserves the right to terminate the contract and exercise all other rights and remedies provided in the contract or by law.” MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Prince George’s County Public Schools has a Minority Business Enterprise Program in effect. Information about this program and forms for compliance are available online at www.pgcps.org. On the main page in the upper left corner click “About Us” scroll down to “Highlights” click on Policies and Administrative Procedures and click on “Administrative Procedures.” Download or view forms for click for Administrative Procedure 7419 (State of Maryland Guidelines) – click on New Construction -7000. All firms submitting a proposal must complete the appropriate forms and submit the forms with their proposal. For this project, the BOARD will recognizes minority certification the State of Maryland Department of Transportation (MDOT) LOCAL MBE INITIATIVE In accordance with Prince George’s County School goals promoting minority and locally based purchases, if all other factors are equal, priority shall be given to a locally based firm. "Locally based firm" in this instance refers to a company or firm with a primary business address located within the geographical boundaries of Prince George’s County. (Admin Procedure 7419) NOTICE TO BIDDERS Bidders wishing to do business with the BOARD are asked to register with the Purchasing Department. The successful bidder must be an active vendor in Oracle to receive Purchase Orders and Payment. To register, contact the Purchasing Department at 301-952-6560 to receive instructions on how to register or visit the Purchasing website at http://www1.pgcps.org/isupplier/. Prince George’s County Public Schools does not discriminate in educational programs, activities or employment on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, age, religion or disability. Bidders will be required to comply with all applicable requirements pertaining to fair labor, state and local government. All bidders are required to provide a Letter of Guarantee with bid submission from their Surety provider confirming their ability to obtain bonding in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the cost proposal project should the firm be the successful awardee.

In accordance with Prince George’s County School goals promoting minority and locally based purchases, if all other factors are equal, priority shall be given to a locally based firm. "Locally based firm" in this instance refers to a company or firm with a primary business address located within the geographical boundaries of Prince George’s County. (Admin Procedure 7419) No Bid may be withdrawn for at least sixty (60) days after the scheduled closing time for receipt of Bids by order of the Board of Education of the Prince George’s County Public Schools, Upper Marlboro, Maryland 20772-9983. Prince George’s County Public Schools accepts no obligations for costs incurred by Bidders in preparing or submitting a Bid and reserves the right to reject any and all Bids received. AWARD The BOARD reserves the right to award the contract to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder complying with all provisions of the bid, provided the bid price is reasonable and it is in the best interest of the BOARD to accept. A contract may be awarded to one or multiple vendors, by item or in the aggregate, or any combination thereof. NON-AWARD Bidder will be notified via email, if their organization is not selected as the apparent lowest responsive bidder. REJECTION OF BIDS The BOARD reserves the right to reject any or all bids in whole or in part and to waive any technicalities or informalities as may best serve the interests of the BOARD, to increase or decrease quantities where quantities are shown and may reject any bid which indicates any omission, contains alteration of form or additions not requested, or imposes conditions s alternate items and may make any award which is deemed to be in the best interest of the BOARD. NON-EXCLUSIVE The intent of this contract is to provide the Board with an expedited means of procuring supplies and/or services at the lowest cost. This contract is for the convenience of the Board is considered to be a "Non-Exclusive" use contract. The Board does not guarantee any usage. The Board will not be held to purchase any particular Brand, in any groups, prices or discount ranges, but reserves the right to purchase any item/items listed in the price schedule submitted. CONTRACTORS IN LEGAL PROCEEDINGS WITH PGCPS PGCPS recognizes the significant costs and imposition on the time of personnel associated with legal proceedings. Accordingly, PGCPS has adopted a process stating that:

“One factor, among others, that are to be considered when awarding a contract or purchase order is the existence of a pending legal dispute – whether in court or an alternative dispute forum – with any contractor or vendor which has submitted a bid or proposal. Before including consideration of the legal dispute as a factor, the Procurement Officer shall seek the advice of the Office of General Counsel regarding the legal dispute and shall obtain the concurrence of the Superintendent or his designee.”

QUESTIONS/POINT OF CONTACT Inquiries should be directed to the following individual: Purchasing Contact Technical Contact Donna Parks, Senior Buyer Henry Lewis, Project Manager Purchasing Office Capital Improvement Programs [email protected] All questions, including requests for technical clarifications, concerning this IFB must be sent via email to: [email protected]. All answers will be provided in the form of an Addendum to the IFB and posted on the website. All questions must be submitted in the form of a Word Document. Telephone inquiries will not be accepted. No district administrators should be contacted.

Bid Posted: …………………………………………………………………………………… April 20, 2016 Pre-Bid Conference: ………….…………………………………………………….……….. (N/A) Questions Due Date: ………………………………………………………………..………… April 28, 2016 Addendum Posted: (approximate date only) ……………………………………………….. May 5, 2016

Bid Due Date: ……………………………………………………………………….…. ……. May 13, 2016 BID SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS Vendors must return the following documentation with the bid response. Failure to sign and return these documents may cause your bid to be ruled non-responsive and ineligible for further evaluation or consideration.

1. One (1) Original and Two (2) Copies of the bid response and one (1) CD, including supporting documentation. 2. Addenda (All addenda posted on the website must be signed in blue ink and returned with the technical bid. It is the

Bidder’s responsibility to check the Purchasing Department’s website for all addenda posted in response to this IFB. 3. Complete, sign and submit all Affidavits included with the bid (originals shall be submitted with bid) 4. Bid Bond is required of 5% at the time of bid opening. 5. Local MBE Notice Attachment A 6. Minority Business Procedure 7419 is applicable (see bid for submittal of required forms)

Certified Minority Business Enterprise Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit State Attachment A (PGCPS Attachment 1 to AP 7419 (pages 1 and 2)

MBE Participation Schedule State Attachment B (PGCPS Attachment 2 to AP 7419) 7. Registered Maryland Contractor Number:

Bidders are required to provide evidence of certification certifying bidder’s qualifications to provide services as required. Please provide certification with bid or statement attesting to competency of personnel and identifying the basis upon which such statement is made.

Bidders shall place on the outside of the envelope containing their bid and on their Bid Form over a valid signature the following notation: Registered Maryland Contractor No.: _______________________________ for the current year.

9. Executed Insurance Checklist Form 10. Bid Form (See Section V) 11. Submit firm background – Proposer(s) must furnish satisfactory evidence indicating that they have prior experience

with Prince George’s County Public School Capital Improvements Projects. 12. Submit a notarized statement regarding the firm’s ability to provide the services listed in the scope of services noted in

the project specifications as well the following: List any proposed sub-contractors - Provide relevant summary background. List of proposed personnel – Provide resumes for the proposed key personnel and other employees that will be

directly involved in the construction including their applicable project resume. 13. Submit three (3) References –Please provide the following information for each reference. All references must contain

similar projects completed within the past 5 years. Firm or Agency Name Project Description List of Services Provided

Bids are due by 2:00 p.m. on May 13, 2016

Submit packages to:

Prince George’s County Public Schools Purchasing and Supply Services Department

Facilities Administration Building 13300 Old Marlboro Pike, Room 20

Upper Marlboro, MD 20772

ALL ORIGINAL RESPONSES MUST BE SIGNED IN BLUE INK

SECTION I GENERAL CONDITIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

I. GENERAL

A. Any Contract awarded as the result of any Invitation for Bid to furnish supplies, equipment or services to the BOARD OF EDUCATION, PRINCE GEORGE'S COUNTY, Upper Marlboro, Maryland shall include, in whole or in part, either attached or incorporated by reference, binding in all respects, these provisions.

B. It is the intent of this Invitation for Bid to provide prospective bidder(s) with complete information relative to the

total performance of any resultant contract. Bidders are obligated to read and understand all parts of this invitation for Bid and to obtain clarification of any part not thoroughly understood, before submitting their proposal.

C. Contract shall be deemed executory only to the extent of appropriations available to the BOARD for the purchase of

such articles. The obligation of the BOARD on all contracts, including those which envision funding through current and successive fiscal years, shall be contingent upon actual Board appropriations for the fiscal year(s) involved.

D. All parts of this Invitation for Bid including the GENERAL CONDITIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO

BIDDERS, any addenda, amendments, modifications or any other extraneous matter incorporated by reference, will be applicable to any contract(s) awarded as a result of this Invitation for Bid.

E. The respondent is required to submit one (1) original and two (2) copies of the proposal and one (1) CD of the

complete proposal and any other applicable documents specific to this Invitation for Bid. F. Bidder must identify the IFB by placing the IFB number, opening date and time in the lower left hand

corner of the envelope. The bidder is solely responsible for the arrival of the proposal in the PURCHASING OFFICE, FACILITIES ADMINISTRATION BUILDING, 13300 OLD MARLBORO PIKE, ROOM 20, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983, prior to the prescribed deadline for return of bids. Bids will be opened publicly after the time set for receipt and may be read aloud. Bidders may attend bid openings. Since bids must be received in a sealed envelope, FACSIMILE COPIES TRANSMITTED VIA "FAX" MACHINES, OR SIMILAR METHODS, WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED

Late bids will not be considered for award accepts under the following conditions:

1. The bid was sent by mail and it was determined by the BOARD that the late receipt was due solely to miss handling by the BOARD after receipt of the address specified in the solicitation. If the BOARD declares administrative or liberal leave scheduled bid openings or receipt of bids will be extended to next business day.

G. The time, prescribed on the title page of this Invitation for Bid as the deadline for return of bids, shall be Eastern

Standard Time. H. In the event of inclement weather on the date this bid is scheduled to open and the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF

PRINCE GEORGE'S COUNTY CENTRAL OFFICES are closed, bid responses will be opened at the PURCHASING OFFICE on the next business day. The time of opening on the next business day will be the same as that of the scheduled day. Bid responses will be accepted until the time of opening on the next business day.

II. CONTRACT COMPLETTION

A. The project shall commence from date of award through contract completion as specified in the bid document. The project completion date is August 10, 2016.

III. AWARD

A. The BOARD reserves the right to award the contract to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder complying with all provisions of the bid, provided the bid price is reasonable and it is in the best interest of the BOARD to accept. A contract may be awarded to one or multiple vendors, by item or in the aggregate, or any combination thereof.

IV. ADDENDUM A. Any addenda to this solicitation issued after this solicitation and before the due date shall become part of the

contract. It is the responsibility of the bidder to make inquiry as to addenda issued. The BOARD will post all addenda to the solicitation on the BOARD’s website.

V. BID WITHDRAWAL

A. Bids may be withdrawn or modified upon receipt of written request received before the time specified for bid opening. Requests received after bid opening will not be considered.

VI. ERRORS IN BIDS

A. Failure of the bidder to thoroughly understand all aspects of the Invitation for Bid before submitting his/her bid will not act as an excuse to permit withdrawal of his/her bid nor secure relief on plea of error. Neither State Law nor Regulation make allowance for errors either of omission or co-mission on the part of the bidders. Obvious, apparent errors in a bid may be corrected or withdrawn upon written approval by the BOARD.

When an error is made in extending total prices the unit bid price will govern. Erasures in bids must be initialed by the bidder. Carelessness in quoting prices or in preparation of bid will not relieve the bidder from performing the contract. Errors discovered after public opening cannot be corrected and the bidder will be required to perform if the bid is accepted.

VII. REJECTION OF BIDS

A. The BOARD reserves the right to reject any or all bids in whole or in part and to waive any technicalities or informalities as may best serve the interests of the BOARD, to increase or decrease quantities where quantities are shown and may reject any bid which indicates any omission, contains alteration of form or additions not requested, or imposes conditions s alternate items and may make any award which is deemed to be in the best interest of the BOARD.

VIII. PROTEST

A. The Director of Purchasing and Supply Services shall attempt to resolve informally all protest of bid award recommendations. Vendors are encouraged to present their concerns promptly to the Buyer and/or Purchasing Supervisor for consideration and resolution. Open dialogue is helpful for all parties and disputes are often only a misunderstanding of the evaluation and recommendation process.

1. An interested party (bidding of standing or offeror) may protest to the Director of Purchasing and Supply

Services a proposed award of a contract for supplies, equipment, services, or maintenance. A bidder of standing is a bidder who would be directly next in line for an award should the protest be supported.

a. The protest shall be in writing addressed to the Purchasing Supervisor with a copy to the Director and shall

include the following: The name address and telephone number(s) of the protester. Identification of the solicitation Statement of reasons for the protest Supporting documentation to substantiate the claim The remedy sought

2. The protest must be files with the Purchasing Office within five (5) calendar days of the recommendation of

award or notification to the bidder or offeror that their bid or proposal will be rejected.

3. A vendor who does not file a timely protest before the contract is executed by the Board is deemed to have waived any objection.

4. The Director of Purchasing shall inform the Chief Financial Officer (CFO) upon receipt of the protest.

5. The Director of Purchasing shall confer with the general counsel prior to issuance of a decision regarding

disputes of contracts or awards.

6. The Director of Purchasing shall issue a decision in writing. Any decision of a bid award protest may be appealed to the CFO within two (2) days of issuance of the decision by the Director of Purchasing. The decision of the CFO shall be final.

B. Appeal of Contract Award Decision

1. A vendor who remains unsatisfied after following the procedures may contest a contract awarded by the Board

by filing an appeal to the Maryland State Board of Education as provided by Maryland’s public school law.

IX. VENDOR ACCEPTANCE

A. The successful bidder(s) will receive from the PURCHASING OFFICE, BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE'S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983, a contract. Upon receipt, the bidder must sign and return all copies of the contract.

B. Any required documentation, such as; Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Certificate of Insurance, and other

material required must be submitted by the bidder with the award letter. C. Failure to sign the contract and return all required documents within fifteen (15) calendar days from date of receipt

shall rule your response null and void and, therefore, award shall be made to the next low responsive bidder. The bidder shall forfeit any Bonds so posted. In addition, this may also be cause for removal of your firm from the bidder's list.

X. MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES REQUIREMENTS

A. The Board of Education of Prince George's County Minority Business Program Administrative Procedures No.

7419 (attached) is applicable and will be part of the Bid Requirements. Each bid submitted, including submittals from certified Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) firms, in response to this solicitation, MUST SUBMIT AT THE TIME OF BID OPENING a complete Attachment (A) "Certified Minority Business Enterprise Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit" and a complete Attachment (B) "MBE Participation Schedule". All of the work specified to be performed by each MBE firm, the contact information, MDOT certification number, minority code, the dollar values, and percentages must be correct. Failure to adhere to the guidelines outlined in this procedure, may result in your firm being ruled non-responsive and may jeopardize any future awards. Please see Administrative Procedure 7419 for additional forms that shall be considered as part of the contract and MUST be furnished by the apparent low bidder to the MBE Liaison or designated person, within ten (10) working days from notification that the firm is the apparent low bidder.

B. The contractor or supplier who provides materials, supplies, equipment and/or services for this construction project

shall attempt to achieve the specific overall MBE goal of 30% percent (including 7 % African American and 4% Asian owned) of the total dollar value of the construction contract established for this project. All prime contractors, including certified MBE firms, when submitting bids as general or prime contractors, are required to attempt to achieve this goal from certified MBE firms.

C. Only those businesses registered in the Purchasing I-Supplier database and listed in the Minority Business

Enterprise Office directory for the Board of Education of Prince George’s County as a certified minority vendor at

the time of any respective bid opening, shall be recognized as a “Certified Minority Business.” If not listed, evidence of acceptable certification from the Maryland Department of Transportation (MDOT),

D. The Board of Education of Prince George’s County strongly encourages its Contractors to maximize the use of

qualified locally based minority and women-owned business within the geographical boundaries of Prince George’s County. The bidder or proposer should be able to verify, through documentation that good faith efforts were engaged to maximize the use of qualified local minority and women-owned businesses in Prince George’s County. Documentation of good faith efforts may be required to be submitted in the sealed bid packet on the date and at the time due for the respective bid submittal.

E. Minority businesses are encouraged to submit bids in response to this notice. Administrative Procedure No.

7419 may be viewed at the Purchasing Office by prospective bidders. Further information required may be obtained by contacting the Minority Business Officer, Mr. Wes Owens @ at 301-780-5830.

XI. INSURANCE A. The contractor must maintain and pay for Comprehensive Business Insurance to protect their claims under the

Workers’ Compensation Act, from claims or damages because of bodily injury to others, including employees of the BOARD, damage to the property of others, including the BOARD, claims for damages arising out of the operation of motor vehicles, which may arise during the performance of the contract whether caused by themselves or by any sub-contractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, and Product Liability Insurance. Said insurance is to cover the duration of the contract under an express or implied warranty.

B. The following coverage and limits are required of all vendors:

General Liability, including Products Liability & Completed Operations - $1,000,000 per

occurrence/$2,000,000 aggregate Workers Compensation – Statutory Benefits (Only required if the Contractor will be delivering the product(s)). Employers Liability - $500,000 each accident/$500,000 injury by disease/$500,000 injury by disease aggregate

(Only required if the Contractor will be delivering the product(s) to our building). Auto Liability - $1,000,000 combined single limit (Only required if the Contractor will be delivering the

product(s) to our building).

C. The certificate on this insurance shall be made in favor of the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983 and indicate paid up coverage for the term of the contract.

D. The certificate of insurance TO BE SUBMITTED to the PURCHASING OFFICE, FACILITIES

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING, 13300 OLD MARLBORO PIKE, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983.

E. It will be the responsibility of the successful bidder(s) to ensure that a current Certificate of Insurance is on file in

the Purchasing Office during the entire period of the contract. F. The cost of the above insurance shall be considered an overhead or operating expense to the Contractor, similar to

rental costs, utilities, automobile liability insurance, and other business related expenses. The premiums or costs to provide the above insurance shall not be directly related to the cost of the work or services specified in this Invitation for Bid.

XII. SURETY

A. The following SURETY is required in conjunction with this Invitation for Bid and any resultant contract(s). Bonds or checks NOT made in favor of BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE'S COUNTY shall not be accepted. "Prince George's County Public Schools" is not a legal entity, and therefore, bonds or checks made in favor of Prince George's County Public Schools will not be accepted; the bid offer shall be declared non-responsive and not considered for award.

1. Bid Bond

a. Bids must be accompanied by a Bid bond or Certified Check in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid to be made in favor of the

BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983 Certified Checks will be returned to all but the successful bidder(s) within five (5) days after award of contract(s). Successful bidder’s Certified Check will be returned only upon receipt of Performance Bond.

2. Performance Bond, Cashier’s or Certified Check

a. The successful bidder is required to furnish to the BOARD a Performance Bond, Cashier’s or Certified

Check in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of all phases of the contract and to be made in favor of the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983 The above is the legal title for the school system. Deviation from this title shall not constitute intent to furnish and all such documents shall be rejected and returned. Timeliness is of the essence and delays in furnishing acceptable documents may constitute default.

b. The insurance company issuing the bond must have a policyholders rating of A Plus and a financial rating

of Class X per Best’s Rating Service. Said surety must be issued by a bonding company licensed to do business in the STATE OF MARYLAND and acceptable to the BOARD and submitted to the PURCHASING OFFICE, BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983 within 15 calendar days after receipt of award. No contract shall exist prior to return of the signed award and acceptable surety.

c. The Performance Bond, Cashier’s or Certified Check will provide assurance of faithful performance and

discharge of all duties and responsibilities attendant thereto required by law or as provided herein by the contractor of all ASPECTS, TERMS AND CONDITIONS of this contract.

B. In addition to the above surety, the following may be required on certain construction contracts. The successful bidder(s) should be prepared to provide the surety if instructed to do so in any resultant Contract Award.

Labor and Material Payment Bond

a. The successful bidder is required to furnish to the BOARD a LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT

BOND in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of all phases of the contract and to be made in favor of the

BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983 The above is the legal title for the school system. Deviation from this title shall not constitute intent to furnish and all such documents shall be rejected and returned. Timeliness is of the essence and delays in furnishing acceptable documents may constitute default.

b. The insurance company issuing the bond must have a policyholders rating of A Plus and a financial rating of Class X per Best’s Rating Service. Said surety must be issued by a bonding company licensed to do business in the STATE OF MARYLAND and acceptable to the BOARD and submitted to the PURCHASING OFFICE, BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983 within 15 calendar days after receipt of award. No contract shall exist prior to return of the signed award and acceptable surety.

c. The Labor and Material Payment Bond will provide assurance of faithful performance and discharge of all duties and responsibilities attendant thereto required by law or as provided herein by the contractor of all ASPECTS, TERMS AND CONDITIONS of this contract.

XIII. QUALITY

A. QUALITY of materials furnished shall be subject to our inspection upon receipt. If rejected, the material will be

held for disposition at your risk and expense for a period of 30 days. After such period, the BOARD OF EDUCATION will not be responsible for the loss or misplacement of rejected materials.

B. DEVIATIONS from the specification of the materials shall not be accepted without prior written approval from the

Purchasing Office.

C. QUALITY of the material ordered must not be changed without first obtaining our written approval. XIV. LAWS AND PERMITS

A. The contractor shall, without additional cost to the BOARD, be responsible for paying for and obtaining any necessary licenses, inspections and permits for complying with any and all FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL LAWS, CODES AND REGULATIONS, in connection with the performance of the work.

B. Laws of the STATE OF MARYLAND and PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY shall govern the contract.

XV. TAXES

A. Respondents shall assume full responsibility for payment of any and all taxes which may be construed by law

authority as being due for materials ands supplies under any contract with the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY. They shall hold the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY safe and harmless from any liability for said taxes.

B. Responses to the proposal submitted shall not include Federal Excise Taxes or State or Local Sales or Use Taxes

(if applicable). The cost of any taxes (operational and/cost of doing business) that are lawfully due and paid by the contractor may be passed on to the Board of Education as part of the overall cost.

C. The BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY is subject to the provisions of Article 81,

Section 326 (a) of the Annotated Code of Maryland which provides that the Retail Sales Tax shall not apply to the following Sales:

1. State Sales - “Sales to the State of Maryland or any of its political subdivisions. Provided that this sub-section

shall not be construed or applied to exempt any sale, otherwise taxable under this subtitle, or tangible personal property to contractors or builders to be used for the construction, repair or alteration of real property, on contracts advertised for solicitation after July 1, 1968.”

XVI. CHANGES IN TERMS OR DELIVERY/COMPLETION DATE

A. After award of individual contracts, any questions or correspondence related but not limited to the following matters must be directed to the PURCHASING OFFICE, BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE'S COUNTY, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983, in writing:

1. Requests for deviation from the specifications, terms, or conditions of the contract 2. Bonding or insurance 3. Other matters.

B. In the event of strikes, Acts of God, or other circumstances beyond the contractors’ control, which prevent

completion of work or delivery, the contractor must secure temporary contractual relief. The circumstances and duration must be stated by the contractor in writing and be forwarded to the PURCHASING OFFICE within ten (10) days after their development. Contractual relief shall be only that which is acceptable to and in agreement with the PURCHASING OFFICE, for those goods and services, which are necessary for the day-to-day needs of the BOARD.

XVII. INVOICES

A. Invoices must be submitted in DUPLICATE, ACCOMPANIED BY A SIGNED DELIVERY TICKET, TO CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT OFFICE, BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, FACILITIES ADMINISTRATION BUILDING, 13300 OLD MARLBORO PIKE, ROOM 11, UPPER MARLBORO, MD 20772, attention Rita Mack-Woods and contain the following minimal information:

1. Purchase order number 2. Request for Proposal number 3. Delivery destinations as it appears on the purchase document 4. Quantity, item number, and description of item billed 5. Unit price and extended price of item 6. Total amount of invoice

XVIII. PAYMENT

A. Payment will be made upon receipt of proper invoices. Payment shall be NET 45 days from date of receipt of

invoice. XIX. DAMAGES OR INJURY

A. Qualifying contractors will be held pecuniary responsible for any and all damage to BOARD property done or caused by them or their employees or other personnel engaged in the execution of the contract.

B. The contractor shall be similarly responsible for all injury to persons that occur as a result of his fault or

negligence. C. The contractor shall take proper safety and health precautions to protect the work, the workers, the public and the

property of others. D. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage to adjacent property incurred in the performance of the

contract and shall hold the BOARD free of any and all claims for damages arising from the execution of the contract.

XX. TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE

A. This contract may be terminated by the BOARD OF EDUCATION in accordance with this clause in whole or\ in part whenever the Board Contracting Officer shall determine that such a termination is in the best interest of the BOARD OF EDUCATION. Any such termination shall be affected by delivery to the Contractor at least five (5) working days prior to the termination date of a Notice of Termination specifying the extent to which performance shall be terminated and date upon such termination becomes effective. An equitable adjustment in the contract price shall be made for completed service, but no amount shall be allowed for anticipated profit on unperformed services.

XXI. TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT

A. The BOARD OF EDUCATION may, by written notice of default to the Contractor, terminate the whole or any part of the Contract in any one of the following circumstances:

1. If the Contractor fails to make delivery of the supplies or equipment exactly as specified or perform the

services within the time and manner specified herein or any extension thereof, or 2. If the Contractor fails to perform any of the other provisions of this Contract, or so fails to make progress as to

endanger performance of this Contract in accordance with its terms, and in either of these two circumstances does not cure such failure within a period of ten (10) days (or such longer period as the Purchasing Office may authorize in writing) after receipt of written notice from the Purchasing Office specifying such failure, or

3. Willfully attempt to make delivery of items other than the items in the Contract, or perform the services other than specified as to quality, contents of pack, work processes or otherwise, without specific authorization in the form of a contract amendment, or

4. If a determination is made by the BOARD OF EDUCATION that the obtaining of the Contract was influenced

by an employee of the BOARD having received a gratuity, or promise thereof, in any way or form. XXII. DISCLOSURE

A. Bidder shall not disclose information concerning work under this Agreement to any third party, unless such disclosure is necessary for the performance of the Agreement effort. No news releases, public announcement, denial or confirmation of any part of the subject matter of this Agreement or any phase of any program hereunder shall be made without prior written consent of the Board. The restrictions of this paragraph shall continue in effect upon completion or the parties may mutually agree upon termination of this Agreement for such period of time as in writing. In the absence of a written established period, no disclosure is authorized. Failure to comply with the provisions of this Clause may be cause for termination of this Agreement.

XXIII. INFRINGEMENT OF PATENT, TRADEMARK, COPYRIGHT, TRADE SECRET, OTHER INTEREST

A. The following terms apply to any infringement, of claim or infringement, of any patent, trademark, copyright, trade secret or other proprietary interest based on the manufacture, normal use or sale of any material, equipment, programs or services furnished by Bidder to the Board, unless such infringement or claim results from the Bidder following written instruction or directions of The BOARD. Bidder shall indemnify the Board, for any loss, damage, expense, or liability that may result by reason of any such infringement or claim. Bidder shall defend or settle, at Bidder’s own expense, any action or suit for which Bidder is responsible hereunder. The Board shall notify Bidder promptly of any claim or infringement for which Bidder is responsible and shall cooperate with Bidder in every way to facilitate the defense of any such claim.

XXIV. NON-DISCRIMINATION

A. The Contractor is to conduct business in a non-discriminatory manner prohibiting discrimination in any manner against any employee or applicant for employment because of sex, race, creed, color, age, mental or physical disability, sexual orientation or national origin.

XXV. RIGHT TO DATA

A. All data, reports and other documents generated for the BOARD and accumulated by the consultant/contractor in the performance of this order/award, shall remain the property of the BOARD, and shall be returned to the control of the BOARD upon completion of the contract. No personal student or BOARD information, as defined by federal and state law and BOARD policy, shall be disclosed or published unless otherwise agreed herein.

XXVI.RIGHT TO AUDIT

A. The contractor shall agree that in accordance with Section 952 of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1980, its contracts, books, documents and records will be made available to the Comptroller General of the United States and the BOARD until the expiration of services is finalized under this Agreement.

XXVII. AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS

A. A contract shall be deemed executory only to the extent of appropriations available to the BOARD for the purchase of such articles. The obligation of the BOARD on all contracts, including those which envision funding through current and successive fiscal years, shall be contingent upon actual Board appropriations for the fiscal year(s) involved.

XXVIII. RESTRICTIONS

A. Potential contractors/vendors of the Board of Education of Prince George's County Schools are advised that Maryland law now provides the following mandatory restrictions on registered sex offenders performing work or services on school system property:

B. "A person who enters into a contract with a county board of education or a nonpublic school may not knowingly

employ an individual to work at a school if the individual is a registrant. A person who violates this section is guilty of a misdemeanor and on conviction is subject to imprisonment not exceeding 5 years or a fine not exceeding $5,000 or both."

C. Persons or entities awarded contracts with the Board of Education of Prince George's County are required to certify

that no employee, subcontractor, subcontractor employee, or material supplier that is a registered sex offender will be allowed to enter onto school system property at any time in the performance of the work or services for which the contract is awarded. Such certification is a condition precedent to any contract award, and failure to so certify will be grounds for not awarding a contract. It will be the responsibility of contractors to obtain similar certification from all sub-contractors and material suppliers performing work or services on school system property and to monitor adherence to this requirement. In the event that the Board of Education of Prince George's County determines that a registered sex offender has entered upon school system property in the performance of work for a contractor/vendor, such will be grounds for termination of the contract.

XXIX. FINGERPRINT AND BACKGROUND CHECKS

A. Pursuant to BOARD Administrative Procedure 4215, all Independent Contractors and Outsourced Agencies and their employees who will be on BOARD property and may have contact with students, MUST have a fingerprint and background check provided by the BOARD at the contractor’s expense. The contractor will be responsible to call the Fingerprinting Office at 301-952-6775 to schedule an appointment.

XXX. BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION

A. Bidders may be required to furnish satisfactory evidence that they are qualified dealers or manufacturers of the items listed, or regularly engaged in performing the services on which they are bidding, and in both cases maintain a regularly established place of business. An authorized representative of the BOARD OF EDUCATION may visit any prospective Contractor's place of business to determine his/her ability, capacity, reliability, financial stability and other factors necessary to perform the Contract.

XXXI. FAILURE TO RESPOND

A. Failure to make response to this invitation for bid may cause removal of your name from our bidder’s mailing list for this commodity or service. Those bidders wishing to remain on the mailing list for this commodity or service but do not desire to submit a bid at this time, should affix the enclosed mailing label, marked "no bid", to an envelope with the company's name and return address clearly shown, and mail as indicated on the label. If you are not a supplier of this commodity or service submit a "no bid" and request your name be removed from our mailing list for this commodity or service only.

XXXII. ASBESTOS

A. This is to notify all Offerers of the existence of asbestos containing materials used in the Prince George's County Public Schools. Contractor’s employees, including subcontractors, are prohibited from conducting any activities that can result in damage to asbestos containing material or in the release of asbestos fibers into the air. The Prince George's County Public Schools has inspected all buildings per the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) and maintains a management plan for each building that details the location and condition of all asbestos containing materials. It is required that a responsible official of the successful offeror’s company visit the Prince George's County Public Schools Environmental Office to review and understand the management plan for the building(s) involved in this specification. THE CONTRACT MAY NOT BE AWARDED UNTIL THIS REQUIREMENT IS MET. Access to the material is required. It is the responsibility of the Offerer to arrange such a review via the Contractual Point of Contract listed below.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all asbestos removal within the work area and shall include in his proposal all costs related to asbestos removal.

C. The BOARD recognizes that Offerers may need to review the management plans and/or make a site visit to the school involved in the specification before submitting their proposals. Offerer should call the Prince George's County Public School’s Environmental Office at 301-952-6525 to make arrangements for such actions.

D. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to make his/her employees and all Subcontractors’ employees aware of the

existence and location of all asbestos containing material and to take appropriate action in accordance with all applicable federal, state and county guidelines whenever the Contractor has discovered any of the following conditions: 1. Asbestos containing material in the work area that must be removed before the Contractor will be able to

continue work. 2. Asbestos containing material in the work area that has preexisting damage. 3. Asbestos containing material in the Contractor’s work area that is undamaged, but which may be affected by

the Contractor’s activity. 4. Work performed by the Contractor has resulted in damage to asbestos containing material or other wise has

caused the release of asbestos fibers into the air.

E. The BOARD reserves the right to back charge the Contractor for the actual cost of all measures required by the BOARD to correct asbestos damage or fiber release episodes that are the result of the Contractor’s actions. The BOARD also reserves the right to conduct work in progress inspections at any time. The BOARD personnel conducting these inspections will be have the authority to immediately stop work if they find work practices that result in damage to asbestos containing material or otherwise result in asbestos fiber release.

F. A verification of the Contractor’s review of the Asbestos Management Plan(s) will be kept in the Contract File.

The Contractor shall submit the following verification to the Owner:

1. SAMPLE FORM:

I/We, he undersigned, have reviewed and understand the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act Management Plan(s). I/We also acknowledge that our employees will be notified of the existence and location of asbestos containing materials as described in the Management Plan. Our employees will take care to avoid damage to such asbestos containing materials and will immediately STOP WORK and Notify the BOARD’s ENVIRONMENTAL OFFICE if any material is damage or if fibers are released into the air.

XXXIII. MOSH

MARYLAND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH (MOSH) REQUIREMENTS

A. All contracts with the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY shall be governed by the STATE OF MARYLAND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (MOSH) LAWS. Where any difference(s) may exist between any particular MOSH standard(s) and the corresponding, related United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standard(s), MOSH LAW SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE.

1. Offerers submitting proposals relative to any BOARD Request for Proposals shall have the obligation and

responsibility of being knowledgeable with any/all MOSH Laws applicable to any respective Request for Proposals, before submitting any offers. Unfamiliarity shall not be recognized, nor considered, as cause for relief from any subsequent contract.

2. Information pertaining to any particular MOSH Law(s) may be obtained from:

STATE OF MARYLAND DEPARTMENT OF LICENSING AND REGULATION Division of Labor and Industry/Maryland Occupational Safety and Health 1100 North Eutaw Street

Baltimore, Maryland 21202 Telephone No.: 410-767-2215

B. Delivery/Installation

1. In the performance of this contract, the contractor, their sub-contractor(s), agent, representative, or designee

shall conform to all MOSH requirements in the performance of deliveries or installation of equipment and materials ordered herein.

C. Equipment/Materials

1. The contractor shall be responsible to deliver only that equipment and materials which conforms in all respects

to MOSH requirements. Any deficiencies found by MOSH inspectors or the BOARD SAFETY OFFICER in equipment or materials delivered herein and deficient to MOSH standards existing at the time of the contract award, shall be promptly corrected by the contractor at no cost to the BOARD OF EDUCATION.

D. Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH) “Access to Information About Hazardous and Toxic

Substances” Law (Article 89)

1. All contractors providing products deemed as “hazardous” under the above referenced Law, shall provide properly completed Material Safety Data Sheets (including any up-dated information) for the respective products. The Material Safety Data Sheets shall be mailed to the SAFETY OFFICE, BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, FACILITIES ADMINISTRATION BUILDING, 13300 OLD MARLBORO PIKE, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983; and the mailing shall coincide with date of shipment of the respective product(s) to the designated location as specified in the Request for Proposal.

2. All contractors shall also have the responsibility to ensure that each container of hazardous chemical delivered is labeled, tagged, or marked in accordance with MOSH Article 89 Law and have the following minimal, acceptable information:

a. Identity of the hazardous chemical. b. Appropriate hazardous warnings. c. Name and address of the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor. Labels, tags, or markings shall be legible, printed in English, and prominently displayed on each container, as required by Law.

3. All contractors shall have the responsibility of furnishing sufficient additional labels, if needed, upon the BOARD’S request, at no additional cost to the BOARD.

a. The BOARD reserves the right to refuse acceptance of any product(s) whether delivered or installed,

which does not conform to the aforementioned MOSH Article 89 requirements, with the cost of return or replacement being the total responsibility of the providing contractor.

XXXIV.BUY AMERICAN STEEL

A. Consistent with the provisions of the Maryland Annotated Code, Article 78A, Sections 68 through 72,

inclusive, known as the "Buy American Steel" Act of the General Assembly of Maryland, Acts of 1978. B. Wherever in these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, "steel products," as hereafter defined, are part of the

supplies, services or construction required by Owner, for the construction, reconstruction, alteration, repair, improvement or maintenance of public works, the parties bidding shall predicate their base offer solely upon "steel products" manufactured in the United States of America or one of its territories, continental or insular, subject to the jurisdiction of the United States, unless such "steel products" are not produced in the United States in sufficient quantities to meet the requirements of the Contract, in which event the Total Base Bid is to contain a certification to this effect.

C. Each bidder shall furthermore attach to his BID FORM (using the Substitution Request Form), the proposed cost of the supplies, services or construction required by Owner where foreign "steel products" are proposed to be used.

D. The Owner, in addition to all other reservations set forth in the Bidding Requirements, shall at the time of the

issuance of the Award and Contract pursuant thereto, determine whether the supplies, services or construction required is to utilize "steel products" of domestic or foreign origin.

E. Note further, that in the event the Award and Contract pursuant thereto is predicted upon the utilization of

domestic "steel products," then, in addition to all other requirements mandated for performance hereafter in these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, and all documents issued in conjunction therewith, the person, corporation, partnership, or other business unit or association to whom the Award and Contract pursuant thereto is issued, shall as a further condition precedent to the obtaining of final payment from Owner, furnish same with a certificate under oath that all "steel products" supplied, delivered or constructed were of domestic origin.

F. The "Buy American Steel" Act of Maryland defines "steel products" as any product: "rolled, formed,

shaped, drawn, extruded, forged, cast, fabricated, or otherwise similarly processed, or processed by a combination of two or more of such operations, from steel made in the United States by the open hearth, basic oxygen, electric furnace, bessemer, or other steel making process."

SECTION II SPECIAL PROVISIONS and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDER

Prince Georges County Public Schools is soliciting sealed bids from construction firms that meet all pre-requisite qualification criteria stated below for an addition and classroom renovation project totaling approximately 16,260 Square Feet at the current site of Surrattsvile High School located at 6101 Garden Drive, Clinton Maryland 20740. 1. Required Bidder Qualifications

Only firms licensed by the State of Maryland and meeting ALL of the following criteria are eligible to submit bids on this solicitation for consideration of contract award:

a. Firm shall represent that they have provided successful construction services in Prince George’s County for a

minimum of three (3) public buildings of similar scope. Firm in existence for at least ten (10) years performing construction services for projects similar in scope.

Sealed bids are due in the Purchasing Department, Room 20, Board of Education of Prince George’s County (BOARD), 13300 Old Marlboro Pike, Upper Marlboro, MD 20772-9983 on Friday, May 13, 2016 at 2:00 p.m.

2. Firms shall request complete solicitation documents by contacting Mr. Pershey Drayton, Department of Capital Programs, 13300 Old Marlboro Pike, Room 18, Upper Marlboro, MD 20772 or by email at [email protected] or 301-952-6615. Complete solicitation documents are available electronically.

The following written documentation shall be furnished by bidders when obtaining the solicitation documents: a. Name of Bidder’s Representative b. Bidder’s telephone number c. Bidder’s email address All questions pertaining to the Contract Documents, technical sections, legal documents, and bid submission shall be directed to the buyer. Addendums will be issued by Prince Georges County Public Schools Purchasing Department to prospective prime bidders of record only. Sub-Contractors, vendors and material suppliers interested in submitting a proposal for the project must furnish their proposals to prime bidders of record. Each bid shall be accompanied by bid security in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the Base Bid amount and ALL alternate bid amounts in the form of a Bid Bond as described in the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. Prince Georges County Public Schools reserves the right in its discretion to reject any or all bids and to waive irregularities in any bid. Further, the Board of Education reserves the right to award any combination of alternates or no alternates, which, in its sole discretion, serves the best interests of the County. Certified Minority Business Enterprises are encouraged to respond to this solicitation notice. The contractor or supplier who provides materials, supplies, equipment and/or services for this construction project shall attempt to achieve the specific overall MBE goal of thirty percent (30%) established for this project. All prime contractors, including certified MBE firms, when submitting bids or proposals as general or prime contractors are required to attempt to achieve this goal from State of Maryland certified MBE firms. The sub goals are required for this project. The bidder or offeror is required to submit with its bid or proposal a completed Attachment A Certified MBE Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit and Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule, as described in the solicitation documents.

A Performance and a Payment Bond in the forms provided in the Project Manual, each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of the Contract, and each with satisfactory corporate surety, must be furnished by the successful bidder prior to execution of the Contract.

3. All questions pertaining to the Contract Documents, technical sections, legal documents, and bid submission shall be

directed to Purchasing: Attention: Donna Parks, Senior Buyer, PGCPS, email: [email protected]. 4. This Project IS subject to State Prevailing Wage Scale. 5. Notice of Award and Notice to Proceed will be issued to the successful awardee. 6. Project Schedule: The Construction shall achieve substantial completion by August 10, 2016 for the Classroom Renovations and August

10, 2017 for the TV Studio Addition, and scheduled to commence on or about June 2016. All work shall run concurrent with the construction schedule.

7. PGCPS reserves the right to reduce or withhold contract payment in the event the Contractor does not provide the

Department with all required deliverables within the time frame specified in the contract or in the event that the Contractor otherwise materially breaches the terms and conditions of the Contract until such time as the Contractor brings itself into full compliance with the Contract. Any action on the part of the Department, or dispute of action by the Contractor, shall be in accordance with the provisions of MD Code Ann., State Finance and Procurement Article §§15-215 through 15-223 and with COMAR 21.10.02.

8. Bid validity period is 60 days

SECTION III Scope of Work

PROJECT: Parkdale High School SSR - Homeland Security & Military Science and Global Studies PROJECT/RFP No: 16.177.15 & 16.177.16

LOCATION: 6001 Good Luck Rd, Riverdale, MD 20737 SCOPE OF WORK: See Construction Documents (Drawings & Specifications) GENERAL:

This project is a Design, Bid, Build project which is funded by the State and County. Intent of the Bidding Documents: The Architect has made every effort to set forth in the Bidding

Documents the complete scope of the work. The bidder is nevertheless cautioned that minor omissions or discrepancies in the Bidding Documents shall not excuse him from providing a completed Project in accordance with the intent of these documents. It will be the responsibility of the Bidder to bring any conflicts, omissions, or discrepancies to the attention of the PGCPS project manager via Request for Information prior to the deadline for questions. After execution of the contract, no extra charge will be allowed where such are concluded to conform to normal construction practices and methods. Neither the Architect or Engineer nor the Owner will be responsible for any oral explanations or instructions.

Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all trade permits to complete the construction work. Building permit shall be provided by the Owner.

The Contractor’s Superintendent is to be on site at all times when work is being performed. The Contractor is to provide dumpsters and be responsible for proper disposal of all trash on a daily basis.

The location of a dumpster must be coordinated with PGCPS. Daily cleaning of work area is required. Final cleaning before occupancy as applicable to interior renovations including adjacent corridors and

visual inspection in adjacent spaces above ceiling for debris. PGCPS shall provide Contractor with As-built of existing building and site, upon request. The as-built may include: structural, mechanical, electrical, and fire alarm drawings. Contractor shall investigate the existing building and site prior to beginning construction. Provide all fixed equipment as required by specification – coordinate all equipment to be used/install with

PGCPS Project Manager and School Principal The net allowance stated in the base bid (fee) shall be utilized for unforeseen conditions to cover extra

labor and material costs, if any, and shall be tracked separately from other contract costs. All mark up for this allowance shall be included in the base bid (fee). No additional or credited markup will be allowed for extra work paid for by this allowance. See Allowance Spec section.

This Project IS NOT subject to State Prevailing Wage Scale. Site Stabilization and Permanent Seeding is required for all disturbed areas affected by Construction. Contractor must provide local exhaust to the outside for all odor producing activities; this can be

accomplished by using ducted smoke ejector fans or keeping doors closed and areas in negative pressure to adjacent areas where applicable. Dust barriers must be installed in addition to the exhaust for activities which generate significant dust (i.e. concrete cutting, drywall finishing, etc.)

Any outages to service must be coordinated with PGCPS at least Seventy Two (72) hours in advance with the school staff and the Department of Building Services. While the building is occupied all outages must be performed during other than normal duty hours. The Contractor shall include the cost of all premium time required for outages in the proposal.

Contractor to provide the Board with an “after-hours” emergency telephone number to facilitate emergency responses. Contractor response times to emergency situations or calls shall be within two (2) hours.

The Board also has a policy that prohibits construction activities from being performed on certain days throughout the year. This list of days is not complete, and each individual school may have additional days that will prevent work from being conducted. In addition to scheduled holidays, non-working days will include (not all inclusive): Additional days not mentioned, which the school and the Board's representatives deem necessary to conduct school activities. (School calendar and an overall Board calendar will be provided upon request.)

Primary Election Day Election Day MSPAP Functional Testing SAT Type Testing Graduation Ceremonies First Week of School

SECTION IV BID FORM

PARKDALE HIGH SCHOOL SECONDARY SCHOOL REFORM - HOMELAND SECURITY & MILITARY

SCIENCE AND GLOBAL STUDIES PSCP NO. 16.177.15 & 16.177.16

BIDDER: __________________________________________________________________________ DATE: ____________________________________

GLOBAL STUDIES

A. The total BASE BID, including the cost of all work and the cost of Builder’s All Risk Insurance, which shall be provided separately as informational prices. Please Note: Base bid must include taxes. Vendors are not allowed to submit invoice separately for taxes paid for supplies.

Base Bid: (in words) Total $

Base Bid Includes Allowance referenced Instruction to Bidders and Project Specifications of $10,000.

Cost of Builder’s all Risk Insurance (included in base bid, above): Total $ ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: (in words) Total $ Add Alternate No. 1 – Convertor Boxes, Smartboards, Short-throw Projectors and TVs. 1. Base Bid: Includes the purchase and installation of all infrastructure required to hook up the Smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. 2. Add Alternate #1: Includes the purchase and installation of all the convertor boxes, smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. See specification section 11500 “Educational Equipment”.

HOMELAND SECURITY & MILITARY SCIENCE


Base Bid: (in words) Total $

Base Bid Includes Allowance referenced Instruction to Bidders and Project Specifications of $20,000.

Cost of Builder’s all Risk Insurance (included in base bid, above): Total $ ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: (in words) Total $

Add Alternate No. 1 – Convertor Boxes, Smartboards, Short-throw Projectors and TVs. 1. Base Bid: Includes the purchase and installation of all infrastructure required to hook up the Smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. 2. Add Alternate #1: Includes the purchase and installation of all the convertor boxes, smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. See specification section 11500 “Educational Equipment”. .

B. COMPLETION DATE

I/We agree to erect and achieve project completion, per the schedule below. The Owner shall retain the value of uncompleted work ($500.00) for Liquidated Damages, for each calendar day in excess of the Completion Date set forth herewith.

Substantial Completion: August 10, 2016

C. UNIT PRICES

Unit Prices are for both extra Work and Credits. This list of prices will be submitted with the Bid in duplicate and shall become a part of the Contract upon its award. Unit prices listed below are applicable to all Work in this project involving extra materials/services performed by the General Contractor or his Subcontractors and/or credits to the Owner for materials/services deleted from the project. Unit Prices shall include all overhead and profit for the Subcontractor and General Contractor. Prices, as stated, shall remain in effect through the end of the Contract Warranty period. The undersigned acknowledges the unit price values as part of this bid proposal and agrees to add or delete items for the unit prices identified when directed to do so by the Owner. ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT PRICE

1. Removal and disposal off-site of unusable material Cu.yd $___________ 2. 120-volt Duplex Outlet Ea. $___________ 3. 120-volt Quadplex Outlet Ea. $___________ 4. 100-foot 20-amp Branch Circuit LF. $___________ 5. Fire Alarm Visual Station Ea. $___________ 6. Fire Alarm Audio/Visual Ea. $___________ 7. Smoke Detector, Wired, Installed, Material&Labor Ea. $___________ 8. Data Jack, Each Type Ea. $___________ 9. Ceiling Tile Replacement Ea. $___________ 10. Ceiling Grid Replacement Ea. $___________

11. Installation of Smart Board with System Cabling Ea. $___________ 12. Furnish and Install 2hr Rated Fire Damper Ea. $___________

UNIT PRICES shall include the cost of material, labor, equipment overhead and profit; and shall be a total compensation for the extra work or credit. All materials and workmanship shall be equal in character as specified or as shown on the Drawings and complete, installed and finished.

D. AFFIDAVIT

______________________________________________ being first duly sworn deposes and says that he is an officer in the building construction organization known as ______________________________________________, and the party making a certain proposal or bid dated ________________________, to the Board of Education of Prince George’s County for the Secondary School Reform at Parkdale High School - 6001 Good Luck Rd, Riverdale,

MD 20737, and that this bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly, or indirectly, with any bidder or person to put in a sham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person to fix the bid prices of the affidavit or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of said bid price, or that of any bidder, or to secure any advantage against the Board of Education of Prince George’s County or any other person interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements in said proposal or bid are true. Signature of:

x___________________________________

(Bidder if the bidder is an individual) x___________________________________

(Bidder if the bidder is a partnership) x___________________________________

(Bidder if the bidder is a corporation) Subscribed and sworn before me this ___day of _______.

x___________________________________ Notary Public

My commission expires: _________________________.

END OF BID FORM

Section V

BID PROPOSAL FORM

CONSTRUCTION SERVICES

SURRATTSVILLE HIGH SCHOOL SECONDARY SCHOOL REFORM LAW, EDUCATION, AND PUBLIC SERVICE, GRAPHIC ARTS, NEDIA AND COMMUNICATIONS

PSCP NO. 16.103.15

1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this proposal is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with OWNER to complete all Work as specified or indicated in the following documents for the propose price indicated in this Form:

2. The undersigned BIDDER submits this Proposal with the understanding that the OWNER reserves the right to reject any

or all proposals submitted. 3. BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders. 4. In submitting this Proposal, BIDDER represents that:

(a) BIDDER has examined copies of all the Contract Documents and site.

(b) This Proposal is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; BIDDER has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited or induced any person, firm or a corporation to refrain from bidding; and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for himself any advantage over any other Bidder or over OWNER; and

(c) BIDDER hereby states that he has available adequate equipment and finances to properly and expeditiously execute the Work as bid, and is prepared to present further information to substantiate this statement.

5. BIDDER covenants and warrants that he has had sufficient time to examine the site of the Work; and understand the

performance requirements of Prince Georges County Public Schools and therefore has based the Proposed Pricing inclusive of this requirement.

6. BIDDER has examined the legal requirements (federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations) and the

conditions affecting cost, progress or performance of the work and has made such independent investigations as BIDDER deems necessary.

7. The Bid Form and the following Attachments shall be submitted with proposal:

1. ATTACHMENT No. 1 – Affidavit of non-collusion

ADDENDA

8. The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of, and has included in this Proposal the Work covered by the following Addenda: Addendum No. __________ Dated _______________ 9. BIDDER will complete the Work for the following lump sum price of:

IN WORDS ____________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________($____________________).

Name of company: ____________________________________________________________________ Address: _____________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________ State Zip

By: ___________________________________/s/ ________________________________________

(Title)

Email______________________________________

SUBMITTED this ________ day of _______________, 20____.

(CORPORATE SEAL)

LOCAL MBE INITIATIVE NOTICE TO VENDOR

Minority Business Enterprise Participation: Prince George’s County is strongly committed to ensuring the maximum participation of qualified local minority business on PGCPS projects as contractors and subcontractors for the procurement of goods and services. Notification is hereby given that qualified local minority business are encourage to participate in the bidding process by submitting bid/proposals packages for this project Bidders/Proposers are hereby notified that qualified local minority shall have the maximum opportunity to compete for and perform such contracts and subcontracts and provide material supplies for such contracts and subcontracts in accordance with PGCPS minority initiative. Bidders/Proposers should complete the “Tabulation of Subcontractors and Material Suppliers” form (Attachment A) listing all subcontractors and material suppliers, including qualified local minority business and material suppliers that will participate on this project. Enforcement of Initiative: Any individual or entity that engages in fraud, misrepresent, or wrongful conduct, whether by act or omission, related to its participation in, or eligibility to participate in this Local initiative, shall be in violation of the program. This determination shall be solely at the discretion of PGCPS Purchasing Department. Violators may be subject to, on an individual and/or entity basis, debarment or suspension from participating in the Districts contracts in accordance with the County and/or State Debarment and Suspension Policy All factors being equal, priority shall be given to Vendors in the following sequence

a. The Prince George’s County Minority/ Woman Owned Business b. The Prince George’s County Vendors other than Minority/ Woman Owned Business c. The Maryland vendor who is Minority/ Woman Owned Business d. The Maryland vendor, other than a Minority/ Woman Owned Business

IFB No.: Page No.: 33

AFFIDAVIT This document must be completed, signed by an authorized company official & submitted with your bid response. The signature must be an original (signed in ink) or your bid will be ruled non-responsive. Contractor Bid No. Address City, State and Zip Telephone Fax Email

FOR MINORITY USE ONLY

LOCALLY BASED MINORITY BUSINESS: PGC MBE____ PGC MWE _____ MD MBE_____ MD MWE_____ INDICATE IF YOU ARE A MINORITY BUSINESS CERTIFIED BY: P.G. COUNTY GOVN’T: Certification No.: __________ MD. STATE DEPT. OF TRANSPORATION: Certification No.: ______________________

AFFIDAVIT I The Contractor, his agent, servants and/or employees, have not in any way colluded with anyone for and on behalf of the contractor or themselves, to obtain information that would give the Contractor an unfair advantage over others, not have thy colluded with anyone for and on behalf to the contractor, or themselves, to gain any favoritism in the award of the contract herein.

AFFIDAVIT II No officer or employee of the Board of Education Prince George's County Public Schools, whether elected or appointed, has in any manner whatsoever, any interest in or has received prior hereto or will received subsequent hereto any benefit, monetary or material, or consideration from the profits or emoluments of this contract, job, work or service for the Board, and that no officer or employee has accepted or received or will receive in the future a service or thing of value, directly or indirectly, upon more favorable terms than those granted to the public generally, nor has any such officer or employee of the Board received or will receive, directly or indirectly, any part of any fee, commission or other compensation paid or payable to the Board in connection with this contract, job, work, or service for the Board, excepting, however, the receipt of dividends on corporation stock.

AFFIDAVIT III Neither I, nor the Contractor, nor any officer, director, or partners, or any of its employees who are directly involved in obtaining contracts with the Board have been convicted of bribery, attempted bribery, or conspiracy to bribe under the laws of any state, or of the federal government for acts of omissions committed.

AFFIDAVIT IV Neither I, nor the Contractor, nor any of our agents, partners, or employees who are directly involved in obtaining contracts with the Board have been convicted within the past 12 months of discrimination against any employee or applicant for employment, nor have we engaged in unlawful employment practices as set forth in Section 16 of Article 49B of the Annotated Code of Maryland or, of Sections 703 and 704 of Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964.

AFFIDAVIT V I further affirm that neither I nor the above firm shall knowingly enter into a contract with the Board under which a person or business debarred or suspended from contracting with a public body under Title 16 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland, will provide, directly or indirectly, supplies, services, architectural services, construction related services, leases of real property, or construction. I acknowledge that this Affidavit is to be furnished to the Board. I acknowledge that I am executing this Affidavit in compliance with the provisions of Title 16 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland which provides that persons who have engaged in certain prohibited activity may be disqualified, either by operation in law or after a hearing, from entering into contracts with the Board. I further acknowledge that if the representations set forth in this Affidavit are not true and correct, the Board may terminate any contract awarded, and take any other appropriate action. I do solemnly declare and affirm under the penalties of perjury that the contents of the foregoing affidavit are true and correct to the best of my knowledge, information and belief. Signature Date Printed Name Title- Authorized Official If a corporation, it was organized under the laws of the state of, in the year _______ a partnership, list names of partners .

34

ATTACHMENT A The undersigned states that the following is a complete list of the proposed Subcontractors and Material Suppliers on this project and the class of work to be performed by each, and that such list will not be added to nor altered without written consent of the Purchasing Department. Please add more lines if necessary. Percentage or Price (Check appropriate Business Type) of Work/Material Local Local MD MD Subcontractor Name Class of Work or Material to complete work MWB Other MWB Other 1. _____________________________ _____________________ ________________ 2. _____________________________ _____________________ ________________ 3. _____________________________ _____________________ ________________ 4. ____________________________ _____________________ ________________ 5. ____________________________ ______________________ ________________ Percentage or Price of Work/Material Local Local MD MD Materials Supplier Name Supply/ Material to complete work MWB Other MWB Other 1. _____________________________ _____________________ ________________ 2. _____________________________ _____________________ ________________ 3. _____________________________ _____________________ ________________ 4. ____________________________ _____________________ ________________ 5. ____________________________ ______________________ ________________ Company Name: _____________________________ By: _____________________________ Completion and submission of this form with the bid is Date: ______________________________________ Title: ____________________________ mandatory for bid to be considered responsive.

1

SECTION 00030 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section 00030, Supplementary Instructions, contains modifications to the basic document, AIA Document A701, Instructions to Bidders, 1997 Edition, in the form of additions, deletions and substitutions. Where any part of the basic document is so modified by these Supplementary Instructions, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect.

ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS

DELETE Paragraph 1.2 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Paragraph:

1.2 Except as provided for herein, all definitions set forth in the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other conditions) or in other Contract documents are applicable to the bidding documents.

ADD the following new Sub-paragraph as follows:

1.2.1 The following words are intended to mean: • Furnish (Materials): To supply and deliver to the project ready for installation and in

operable condition. • Install (Services or Labor): To place in final position, complete, anchored, connected and

in operable condition. • Provide: To furnish and install complete. When neither furnish, install nor provide is

stated, provide is implied. ADD the following to the end of Paragraph 1.4 [Add:] “and applicable law.”

ADD the following to the end of Paragraph 1.8 [Add:] “and applicable law.”

ARTICLE 2 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

ADD new Sub-paragraph 2.1.5 as follows:

2.1.5 The Bidder is required to examine carefully in detail the character of the site of the Project, the Contract Documents and all other matters pertinent to the work contemplated. By submitting a bid, the Bidder expressly represents that it has satisfied itself as to the conditions to be encountered, including conditions that are overhead, on the surface and concealed, the character, quality and quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished, and the requirements of the Contract and Specifications. No allowance or concession will be made for the lack of such information. Where underground and overhead structure locations are shown, they are for the information of the Architect only; their correctness is not guaranteed or warranted by the Owner or the Architect, and in no event is this information to be considered a part of the Contract

2

Documents, or to be relied upon in preparing the Bid. If this information is used by the Bidder in preparing its Bid, the Bidder must assume all risks resulting from conditions differing from those shown in the information provided.

Test Boring Information concerning subsurface materials or conditions which are based upon test pits or test borings has been obtained by the Owner for the Architect’s use in designing the Project. This information is available to the Bidder for information only. References to this information may be found in the Table of Contents. The technical data found in the test boring information is represented to be accurate by the Owner, but the conclusions and inferences that may be found in or inferred from the information is not warranted, and the accuracy or completeness of any such conclusions and inferences is not guaranteed by the Owner or the Architect.

By submitting a bid, the Bidder represents that it has not relied upon the subsurface information supplied by the Architect or Owner and assumes all responsibility in excavating for this project for any and all subsurface conditions encountered.

The Owner will, to the extent possible, afford the Bidder the opportunity at the Bidder’s own expense, to make additional borings or soundings, to drive test piles, to dig test pits on the site of the Work, and to make measurements and studies of all kinds.

There is no expressed or implied agreement that the existing conditions have been correctly indicated and bidders shall take into account that conditions affecting the cost or quantities of work to be done may differ from those indicated.

The Bidder shall carefully examine all Bidding Documents and materials pertinent thereto, with respect to all the categories of work for which the Owner has advertised and will receive bids, so that it is completely aware and satisfied as to the character, quality and quantities of all work, materials and for services required or to be provided by the Bidder to perform and complete all work of its Contract on the Project.

Further, the Bidder shall have carefully examined the tentative construction schedule for the work and by submission of a bid, represents that the time set forth for such work is sufficient for the Bidder to complete its work.

Should work to be performed be specified or indicated in more than one Prime Contract and no clarifications received by Addendum prior to the Bid Date, each Prime Contract Bidder so affected who is submitting a bid shall consider the work to be part of its Prime Contract.

A subsequent determination will be made and an amount commensurate to the work to be performed will be deducted from the contractor determined not to be responsible.

The Bidder by submission of its Bid represents that it has visited the site, that it has read the Bidding Documents and understands their full character and intent, that it otherwise complied with the provisions of Article 3, and should the Owner subsequently accept its Bid, no claims,

3

allowances or concessions will be made, accepted or recognized by the Owner at any future time for any additional labor, equipment or materials required, or for any difficulties encountered in the Work, or for the lack of any information which could have been foreseen, apparent or ascertained had the Bidder so complied with Article 3.

The Bidder shall ascertain all governmental and utility requirements with respect to wage scales, materials, labor, safety and sanitation and shall base its bid prices on full compliance therewith. The Bidder has familiarized itself with labor conditions which might affect or influence the performance of the Work.

ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

Paragraph 3.1 -

Copies: Sub-paragraph

3.1.1

DELETE Sub-paragraph 3.1.1 in its entirety, and in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Sub-paragraph:

3.1.1 To download project drawings and specifications please use the following link : https://lukmire.sharefile.com/d-s610f6a0591547c58 All questions pertaining to the Contract Documents, technical sections, legal documents, and bid submission shall be submitted in Word format to [email protected].

Addendums will be issued by Prince Georges County Public Schools Purchasing Department to prospective prime bidders of record only. Sub-Contractors, vendors and material suppliers interested in submitting a proposal for the project must furnish their proposals to qualified prime bidders of record. DELETE Sub-paragraph 3.3.2 in its entirety, and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Sub-paragraph:

3.3.2. Pre-bid substitutions will not be considered. Following the award of contracts, substitutions proposed by the awarded contractors will be considered in accordance with

Division 1 Section “Substitutions” of the Specifications.

DELETE Sub-paragraph 3.3.3 in its entirety.


Paragraph 3.4 - Addenda:

ADD new Sub-subparagraph 3.4.1.1 as follows:

4

3.4.1.1 Clarifications to the Bidding Documents will only be made in writing, by Addenda or Bulletin. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or have any legal effect. DELETE Sub-paragraph 3.4.3 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Sub-paragraph:

3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids.

DELETE Sub-paragraph 3.4.4 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Sub-paragraph:

3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Bulletins and Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge, where indicated on the Bid Form, their receipt. Failure of any bidder to receive any bulletin or Addenda as provided for herein shall not release such bidder from the obligation of their Proposal.

ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES

Paragraph 4.1 - Preparation of Bids: ADD the following new sentences to the end of Sub-paragraph 4.1.1: 4.1.1 [Add:] "Attention is directed to the Bid Forms bound in the Project Manual. These forms are for the information and convenience of the Bidder and are not to be detached from the Project Manual, or filled out or executed. A separate copy of each Bid Form is furnished with the Bidding Documents. Complete two (2) separate copies of the Bid Form and accompanying documents, execute and submit as specified in the Advertisement for Bid”.

ADD the following new sentence to the end of Sub-paragraph 4.1.5:

4.1.5: [Add:] “Failure to enter an amount or “No Change” for an Alternate shall be construed to mean that no change in the Base Bid is required.” INSERT the following sentence after the second sentence of Sub-paragraph 4.1.7: 4.1.7 [Insert:] "The signature of any person, appearing on the Bid Form, shall be in longhand and in ink."

Paragraph 4.2 - Bid Security:

AMPLIFY Sub-paragraph 4.2.1 as follows: 4.2.1 [Amplify:] "Bid security in the type and amount stated in the Advertisement for Bids shall accompany the Bid. Bid Bonds shall be in the form set forth in the Project Manual. Bid bonds shall name as obligee and checks shall be made payable to Prince George’s County Public Schools. Bidders who submit security in cash or check form shall be bound by the conditions set forth in the Bid Bond.”

DELETE Sub-paragraph 4.2.2 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following

5

new Sub-paragraph: 4.2.2 If a Surety Bond is used for the Bid Security it shall be written on a form similar to the enclosed Bid Bond form only, and the Attorney-in-fact who executes the Bond on behalf of the Surety shall affix to the Bond a certified and current copy of his power of attorney.

DELETE Sub-paragraph 4.2.3 in its entirety, and in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Sub-paragraph:

4.2.3 The Owner may declare the Bid Security forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages if, following the designation, within the firm-bid period, of the Bidder as the apparently lowest responsible Bidder, such Bidder shall thereafter fail to (1) deliver to the Owner within the prescribed time the properly executed Performance Bond and Payment Bond if required by these Contract Documents or (2) if Notice of Intent to Award is given to such Bidder, deliver to the Owner, within the prescribed time, the properly executed counterparts of the construction Agreement and all evidences of insurance as required by these Contract Documents. The Bid Security of all Bidders will be returned (unless previously forfeited as aforesaid) upon (1) the execution of the construction Agreement by the Owner (provided in the case of the Bidder with whom said Agreement is entered into, all required evidences of insurance and Bonds have been previously delivered to the Owner) or (2) the rejection by the Owner of all bids or (3) the expiration of the firm-bid period, including any extensions by operation of law or by mutual consent of the Owner and the apparently lowest responsible Bidder.

Paragraph 4.3 - Submission of Bids:

ADD the following new sentence to the end of Sub-paragraph 4.3.1 as follows: 4.3.1 [Add:] “The Owner shall not be responsible for the opening of Bids not submitted in compliance with these Instructions to Bidders or Supplementary Instruction to Bidders.”


4.3.5 [Add:] The documents to be submitted on bid day are as follows:

1. Two (2) Original Bid Form 2. Two (2) Bid Security 3. Two (2) Anti-Bribery Affidavit 4. Two (2) Sales Tax Certification


4.3.6 [Add:] The Owner reserves the right to waive non-material defects or informalities in any and all bids.


4.3.7 [Add:] Bidder must identify the IFB by placing the IFB number, opening date and time in the lower left hand corner of the envelope. The bidder is solely responsible for the arrival of the proposal in the PURCHASING OFFICE, FACILITIES ADMINISTRATION BUILDING, 13300 OLD MARLBORO PIKE, ROOM 20, UPPER MARLBORO, MARYLAND 20772-9983, prior to the prescribed deadline for return of bids. Bids will be opened publicly after the time set for receipt and may be read aloud. Bidders may attend bid openings. Since bids must be received in a sealed envelope, FACSIMILE COPIES

6

TRANSMITTED VIA "FAX" MACHINES, OR SIMILAR METHODS, WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.

Paragraph 4.4 - Modification or Withdrawal of Bid: DELETE Sub-paragraph 4.4.1 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Sub-paragraph:

4.4.1 Bids may not be withdrawn by the Bidder for a period not to exceed 60 calendar days following the actual date of opening thereof. However, if award of Contracts is delayed by a required approval of another government agency, the sale of bonds or the award of a grant or grants, the Bids may not be withdrawn by the Bidder for a period not to exceed 120 days from the date of Bid opening.


4.4.2 Bidders may withdraw Bids at any time up to the scheduled time for opening of Bids. The withdrawal of the Bid prior to the deadline for bidding may occur only by appearing in person, by First-Class mail, or by fax. Bids may not be modified after the deadline for submittal. After the deadline for submittal, no Bid may be withdrawn.

4.4.2 Bids may be withdrawn or modified upon receipt of written request received before the time specified for bid opening. Requests received after bid opening will not be considered

MODIFY Sub-paragraph 4.4.3 as follows: 4.4.3 [Modify:] “…fully in conformance with these Bidding Documents.”

ARTICLE 5 -CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

Paragraph 5.1 - Opening of Bids: DELETE the first part of the first sentence of Paragraph 5.1 up to and including “Advertisement or Invitation to Bid” and begin this sentence as follows: 5.1 “The properly identified Bids………………”

Paragraph 5.2 - Rejection of Bids:


5.2.1 The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals for one or more Contracts, or parts thereof, or items therein. The Owner reserves the right to disqualify Bids, before or after opening, upon evidence of collusion with intent to defraud or other illegal practices upon the part of the Bidder, or by other means permissible under applicable law.


5.2.2. The BOARD reserves the right to reject any or all bids in whole or in part and to waive any technicalities or informalities as may best serve the interests of the BOARD, to increase or decrease quantities where quantities are shown and may reject any bid which indicates any omission, contains alteration of form or additions not requested, or imposes conditions such as

7

alternate items and may make any award which is deemed to be in the best interest of the BOARD.

Paragraph 5.3 - Acceptance of Bid (Award):

AMPLIFY Sub-paragraph 5.3.1 as follows:

5.3.1 [Amplify:] The Owner, before making an award, may require any Bidder, upon at least three (3) days request to present satisfactory evidence, in the form specified by the Owner, of their experience, qualifications, financial ability, and other matters reasonably related to their ability to satisfactorily perform and complete the Work covered by their Proposal.

The Owner reserves the right to consider such matters, facts and circumstances presented by the Bidder, as shall be permitted by Maryland law, in making a determination whether the Bidder is a responsible Bidder. The Owner reserves the right to request such other information or data as they may deem necessary to evaluate the qualifications of the Bidder to satisfactorily perform the functions of the Contractor.

Award: The BOARD reserves the right to award the contract to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder complying with all provisions of the bid, provided the bid price is reasonable and it is in the best interest of the BOARD to accept.

Non-Award: Bidder will be notified via email, if their organization is not selected as the apparent lowest responsive bidder.

ADD new Sub-paragraphs as follows:

5.3.3 After review of the Bids, during the Bid period stipulated in Article 4.4.1, at its sole discretion, the Owner may issue a Notice of Intent to Award and an unexecuted Agreement between Owner and Contractor. Upon receipt of Notice of Intent to Award, the General Contractor shall, within five (5) calendar days, deliver to the Owner the following:

1. Executed Agreement (executed in the required number of counterparts) in the form set forth in the Contract Documents.

2. Performance and Payment Bonds as set forth in the Contract Documents and Article 7 of the Instructions to Bidders.

3. Insurance Certificate, policies or other evidence of insurance set forth in the Contract Documents.

4. Post Bid Information required in Article 6 of the Instructions to Bidders.

Failure of the Bidder to whom Notice of Intent to Award has been given to deliver the above items required by the Contract Documents, within five (5) days, shall constitute grounds for the Owner to declare the Bidder's Bid Security forfeited.

Upon receipt of the documents listed above, the Owner may at its sole discretion, award the Contract by executing the Agreement and issue a written Notice to Proceed which shall establish the start of the Contract duration.

5.3.4 The Owner shall execute and return to the Contractor, one (1) copy of the executed Agreement and shall issue the Notice to Proceed for the Work.

5.3.5 When a Unit Price is rejected by the Owner, any additional work that would have been subject to that unit price shall be subject to Article 7 of the General Conditions for the

8

Contract for Construction and the Supplementary General Conditions.

ADD new Sub-paragraph 5.4 as follows:

Paragraph 5.4 – Late Bids:

5.4.1 Late bids will not be considered for award except under the following conditions:

.1 The bid was sent by mail and it was determined by the BOARD that the late receipt was due solely to miss handling by the BOARD after receipt of the address specified in the solicitation. If the BOARD declares administrative or liberal leave scheduled bid openings or receipt of bids will be extended to next business day.

.2 The time, prescribed as the deadline for return of bids, shall be Eastern Standard Time.

.3 In the event of inclement weather on the date this bid is scheduled to open and the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE'S COUNTY CENTRAL OFFICES are closed, bid responses will be opened at the PURCHASING OFFICE on the next business day. The time of opening on the next business day will be the same as that of the scheduled day. Bid responses will be accepted until the time of opening on the next business day.


Paragraph 5.5 - Bid Protest:

5.5.1 The Director of Purchasing and Supply Services shall attempt to resolve informally all protest of bid award recommendations.

5.5.1.1 A bidder may protest to the Director of Purchasing and Supply Services a proposed award of a contract. The protest shall be in writing addressed to the Purchasing Supervisor with a copy to the Director and shall include the following:

The name address and telephone number(s) of the protester. Identification of the solicitation Statement of reasons for the protest Supporting documentation to substantiate the claim The remedy sought

5.5.1.2 The protest must be file with the Purchasing Office within five (5) calendar days of the bid opening or notification to the bidder or offeror that their bid or proposal will be rejected.

5.5.1.3 A vendor who does not file a timely protest before the contract is executed by the Board is deemed to have waived any objection.

5.5.1.4 The Director of Purchasing shall inform the Chief Financial Officer (CFO) upon receipt of the protest.

5.5.1.5 The Director of Purchasing shall confer with the general counsel prior to issuance of a decision regarding disputes of contracts or awards.

9

5.5.1.6 The Director of Purchasing shall issue a decision in writing. Any decision of a bid award protest may be appealed to the CFO within two (2) days of issuance of the decision by the Director of Purchasing. The decision of the CFO shall be final.

5.5.2 Appeal of Contract Award Decision

5.5.2.1 A vendor who remains unsatisfied after following the procedures may contest a contract awarded by the Board by filing an appeal to the Maryland State Board of Education as provided by Maryland’s public school law.


Paragraph 5.6 – Errors in the Bid:

5.6.1 Failure of the bidder to thoroughly understand all aspects of the Invitation for Bid before submitting his/her bid will not act as an excuse to permit withdrawal of his/her bid nor secure relief on plea of error. Neither State Law nor Regulation make allowance for errors either of omission or co-mission on the part of the bidders. Obvious, apparent errors in a bid may be corrected or withdrawn upon written approval by the BOARD.

5.6.2 When an error is made in extending total prices the unit bid price will govern. Erasures in bids must be initialed by the bidder. Carelessness in quoting prices or in preparation of bid will not relieve the bidder from performing the contract. Errors discovered after public opening cannot be corrected and the bidder will be required to perform if the bid is accepted

ARTICLE 6 - POST BID INFORMATION

DELETE Paragraph 6.2 - Owner’s Financial Capability, in its entirety. ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

Paragraph 7.1 - Bond Requirements:


7.1.1 Prior to execution of the Contract the successful Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising in the forms included in the Project Manual and each in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Amount. The Performance Bond shall remain in force and effect until the Contractor's Work has been finally accepted. The Bidder shall pay all premiums in respect of such bonds.


REVISE Sub-paragraph 7.1.3 as follows:

7.1.3 [Revise:] Bonds shall be secured from a surety company as stipulated in Section 00800 Supplementary General Conditions.

Paragraph 7.2 - Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds:

10


7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver properly executed bonds to the Owner no later than five (5) days after written Notice of Intent to Award is issued.


7.2.2 Bonds shall be written on the Performance Bond form and the Payment Bond form included in these Contract Documents for the amount required in these Contract Documents.

7.2.2.1 The Contract Bonds shall be written in the form included in the Project Manual and the Bonds shall be executed by or on behalf of the successful Bidder, as Principal, in the following manner:

7.2.2.2 If the successful Bidder is an individual, the Contract Bonds shall be executed by them personally, their signature shall be witnessed and any trade name employed in the conduct of their business shall be stated.

7.2.2.3 If the successful Bidder is a partnership, the Contract Bonds shall be executed in the name of the partnership by each of the Partners, and the signatures of the Partners shall be witnessed.

7.2.2.4 If the successful Bidder is a corporation, the Contract Bonds shall be executed in the name of the corporation:

(1) by the President or a Vice President and attested by the Secretary or Assistant Secretary and the Corporate Seal shall be attached;

(2) by a duly authorized agent of the corporation whose authority to act, as of the date of the Contract Bonds, shall be established by proof, satisfactory to the Owner, attached to the Contract Bonds.

7.2.2.5 Execute the Contract Bonds in behalf of the surety in such manner as to legally bind the surety. In the event the execution in behalf of the surety is by an agent or agents, a proper power of attorney, evidencing the authority of such agent or agents, shall be attached to the Contract Bonds. Such power of attorney shall bear the same date as the Contract Bonds to which it is attached.

7.2.2.6 Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the state where the project is located.

ARTICLE 8 - FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR


8.1.1 The Agreement shall be written on the form included in these Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 CONSTRUCTION TIME

11

ADD new Article 9 as follows: 9.1 Pre-Construction Conference: Soon after the actual award of the Contract but prior to the start of construction, the Contractor or their representative shall attend a Pre-Construction Conference with representatives of Prince George’s County Public Schools. The conference will serve to acquaint the participants with the general plan of Contract administration and requirements under which the construction operation is to proceed and will inform the Contractor, in detail, of the obligations imposed on them and their subcontractors by the Executive Orders concerning Equal Employment Opportunity.

9.1.1 The date, time and place of the conference will be furnished to the Contractor by the PGCPS Project Manager. 9.2 Contract Time: The Agreement will include a stipulation that the Work shall be substantially complete within 60 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed date and be finally completed and closed out within 75 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed date.

9.3 Time of Completion:

9.3.1 The Bidder agrees that they will commence work within forty-eight (48) hours following receipt of Notice to Proceed from the Owner and shall be substantially completed within the number of calendar days set forth herein.

9.3.2 By submitting a Contract Proposal, the Prime Bidder for General Construction, certifies that they shall coordinate the schedule for the construction of this project with all other Contractors including, but not limited to, preparing and updating the Schedule, holding weekly coordination meetings with all Contractors and submitting a copy of the minutes of those meetings to the Architect on a weekly basis.

9.3.3 By submitting a contract proposal, the General Contractor certifies that the Contract Time set forth herein is sufficient to complete its Work. ARTICLE 10 - GOVERNING LAWS AND REGULATIONS

ADD new Article 10 as follows:

10.1 The Bidder’s attention is directed to the fact that all applicable Federal and State laws, municipal ordinances and codes, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the Project shall apply to the Contract throughout, and they are deemed to be included in the Contract the same as though herein written in full.

10.1.1 Attention is directed to the terms, provisions and conditions of the William-Steiger Safety and Health Act of 1970, which is specifically applicable to this Project.

10.2 Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (O.S.H.A.)

10.2.1 Attention is directed to the terms, provisions and conditions of the William-Steiger Safety and Health Act of 1970, which is specifically applicable to this Project.

10.2.2 The Contractor agrees to be bound by them and further agrees and promises to conform and comply with the Standards set forth in the Act.

10.2.3 The Contractor is required to promptly perform all reporting and recording, compliance

12

and safety as required by said Act.

10.2.4 Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH) “Access to Information About Hazardous and Toxic Substances” Law (Article 89)

10.3 BUY AMERICAN STEEL - Refer to Section 0410-2 of the project specification for additional information

10.4 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM - Refer to Section 00100( Construction Bid Solicitation) of the project manual for detail program procedure

10.4.1 Minority Businesses included in the bid package at time of bid opening cannot be changed without prior approval of the Director of Purchasing and Supply Services.

10.4.2 State Law HB 389 and SB 611, Prime Contractors are prohibited by law from including a certified MBE in a bid or proposal without requesting, receiving, or obtaining the MBE’s authorization. The contractor must also use the MBE’s services to perform the contract. In addition, the contractor may not pay the MBE solely for the use of its name in the bid or proposal.

10.4.3 Prime Contractor may be prosecuted if they fail to comply with the law. The Board is required under the law to report the violation.

ARTICLE 11 – SPECIAL PROVISIONS

ADD new Article 11 as follows:

11.1 The Bidder MUST submit with the bid documents, a Notarized Letter of guarantee from the General Contractor’s Surety certifying their ability to obtain bonding in the amount equal to 100% of the bid price plus alternates, should the General Contractor is the successful awardee.

END OF SECTION 00300

SECTION IV BID FORM

PARKDALE HIGH SCHOOL SECONDARY SCHOOL REFORM - HOMELAND SECURITY &

MILITARY SCIENCE AND GLOBAL STUDIES PSCP NO. 16.177.15 & 16.177.16

BIDDER: __________________________________________________________________________ DATE: ____________________________________

GLOBAL STUDIES


Base Bid: (in words) Total $ Base Bid Includes Allowance referenced Instruction to Bidders and Project Specifications of $10,000.

Cost of Builder’s all Risk Insurance (included in base bid, above): Total $ ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: (in words) Total $ Add Alternate No. 1 – Convertor Boxes, Smartboards, Short-throw Projectors and TVs. 1. Base Bid: Includes the purchase and installation of all infrastructure required to hook up the Smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. 2. Add Alternate #1: Includes the purchase and installation of all the convertor boxes, smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. See specification section 11500 “Educational Equipment”.

HOMELAND SECURITY & MILITARY SCIENCE


Base Bid: (in words) Total $ Base Bid Includes Allowance referenced Instruction to Bidders and Project Specifications of $20,000.

Cost of Builder’s all Risk Insurance (included in base bid, above): Total $ ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: (in words) Total $

Add Alternate No. 1 – Convertor Boxes, Smartboards, Short-throw Projectors and TVs. 1. Base Bid: Includes the purchase and installation of all infrastructure required to hook up the Smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. 2. Add Alternate #1: Includes the purchase and installation of all the convertor boxes, smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. See specification section 11500 “Educational Equipment”. .

B. COMPLETION DATE

I/We agree to erect and achieve project completion, per the schedule below. The Owner shall retain the value of uncompleted work ($500.00) for Liquidated Damages, for each calendar day in excess of the Completion Date set forth herewith.

Substantial Completion: August 10, 2016

C. UNIT PRICES

Unit Prices are for both extra Work and Credits. This list of prices will be submitted with the Bid in duplicate and shall become a part of the Contract upon its award. Unit prices listed below are applicable to all Work in this project involving extra materials/services performed by the General Contractor or his Subcontractors and/or credits to the Owner for materials/services deleted from the project. Unit Prices shall include all overhead and profit for the Subcontractor and General Contractor. Prices, as stated, shall remain in effect through the end of the Contract Warranty period. The undersigned acknowledges the unit price values as part of this bid proposal and agrees to add or delete items for the unit prices identified when directed to do so by the Owner. ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT PRICE

1. Removal and disposal off-site of unusable material Cu.yd $___________ 2. 120-volt Duplex Outlet Ea. $___________ 3. 120-volt Quadplex Outlet Ea. $___________ 4. 100-foot 20-amp Branch Circuit LF. $___________ 5. Fire Alarm Visual Station Ea. $___________ 6. Fire Alarm Audio/Visual Ea. $___________ 7. Smoke Detector, Wired, Installed, Material&Labor Ea. $___________ 8. Data Jack, Each Type Ea. $___________ 9. Ceiling Tile Replacement Ea. $___________ 10. Ceiling Grid Replacement Ea. $___________

11. Installation of Smart Board with System Cabling Ea. $___________ 12. Furnish and Install 2hr Rated Fire Damper Ea. $___________

UNIT PRICES shall include the cost of material, labor, equipment overhead and profit; and shall be a total compensation for the extra work or credit. All materials and workmanship shall be equal in character as specified or as shown on the Drawings and complete, installed and finished.

C. AFFIDAVIT

______________________________________________ being first duly sworn deposes and says that he is an officer in the building construction organization known as ______________________________________________, and the party making a certain proposal or bid dated ________________________, to the Board of Education of Prince George’s County for the Secondary School Reform at Parkdale High School - 6001 Good Luck Rd, Riverdale, MD 20737, and that this bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly, or indirectly, with any bidder or person to put in a sham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person to fix the bid prices of the affidavit or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of said bid price, or that of any bidder, or to secure any advantage against the Board of Education of Prince George’s County or any other person interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements in said proposal or bid are true. Signature of:

x___________________________________

(Bidder if the bidder is an individual) x___________________________________

(Bidder if the bidder is a partnership) x___________________________________

(Bidder if the bidder is a corporation) Subscribed and sworn before me this ___day of _______.

x___________________________________ Notary Public

My commission expires: _________________________.

END OF BID FORM

PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, MARYLAND PUBLIC SCHOOLS PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS PARKDALE HIGH SCHOOL GLOBAL STUDIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 050 - 1 4/20/2016

SECTION 00 050 – LIST OF DRAWINGS

PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, MARYLAND PUBLIC SCHOOLS PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS PARKDALE HIGH SCHOOL GLOBAL STUDIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 050 - 2 4/20/2016

END OF SECTION 00 050

AIA®

Document A107TM – 2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for a Project of Limited Scope

AIA Document A107™ – 2007. Copyright © 1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:09:12 on 03/21/2016 under Order No.1380174819_1 which expires on 06/04/2016, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1128687659)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA® Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document.

AGREEMENT made as of the « » day of « » in the year « » (In words, indicate day, month and year.) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, legal status, address and other information) Board of Education of Prince George's County (Prince Georges County Public Schools) 14201 School Lane Upper Marlboro, Maryland 20772 Telephone Number: (301) 952-6001 and the Contractor: (Name, legal status, address and other information) for the following Project: (Name, location and detailed description) Parkdale High School 6001 Good Luck Road Riverdale, MD Secondary School Reform - Academy of Global Studies and Military Science The Architect: (Name, legal status, address and other information) The Lukmire Partnership 2700 South Quincy Street Suite 300 Arlington, VA 22206 (703) 998-0101 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.


2

TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 2 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3 CONTRACT SUM 4 PAYMENT 5 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 6 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7 GENERAL PROVISIONS 8 OWNER 9 CONTRACTOR 10 ARCHITECT 11 SUBCONTRACTORS 12 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 13 CHANGES IN THE WORK 14 TIME 15 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 16 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 17 INSURANCE & BONDS 18 CORRECTION OF WORK 19 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 20 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT 21 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES EXHIBIT A DETERMINATION OF THE COST OF THE WORK ARTICLE 1 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 2 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 2.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement, if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) « »


3

§ 2.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. § 2.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than « » ( « » ) days from the date of commencement, or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. If appropriate, insert requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.) « »

Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date

, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to achieve Substantial Completion on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the Work.) « » ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT SUM § 3.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be one of the following: (Check the appropriate box.)

[ « » ] Stipulated Sum, in accordance with Section 3.2 below

§ 3.2 The Stipulated Sum shall be « » ($ « » ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.1 The Stipulated Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If the bidding or proposal documents permit the Owner to accept other alternates subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.) « » § 3.2.2 Unit prices, if any: (Identify and state the unit price, and state the quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)

Item Units and Limitations Price Per Unit ($0.00)

§ 3.2.3 Allowances included in the stipulated sum, if any: (Identify allowance and state exclusions, if any, from the allowance price.)

Item Allowance

ARTICLE 4 PAYMENTS § 4.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 4.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.


4

§ 4.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: « » § 4.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the « » day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the « » day of the « » month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than « » ( « » ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.) § 4.1.4 Retainage, if any, shall be withheld as follows: « » § 4.1.5 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) « » % « » § 4.2 FINAL PAYMENT § 4.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 18.2, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment;

.2 the contractor has submitted a final accounting for the Cost of the Work, where payment is on the basis of the Cost of the Work with or without a guaranteed maximum price; and

.3 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. § 4.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: « » ARTICLE 5 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 5.1 BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION For any claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Section 21.3, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box. If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution below, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, claims will be resolved in a court of competent jurisdiction.)

[ « » ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction [ « » ] Other (Specify)

ARTICLE 6 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 6.1 The Contract Documents are defined in Article 7 and, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated in the sections below. § 6.1.1 The Agreement is this executed AIA Document A107–2007, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for a Project of Limited Scope.


5

§ 6.1.2 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages

§ 6.1.3 The Specifications: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) « »

Section Title Date Pages

§ 6.1.4 The Drawings: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) « »

Number Title Date

§ 6.1.5 The Addenda, if any:

Number Date Pages

Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are enumerated in this Article 6. § 6.1.6 Additional documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents:

.1 Exhibit A, Determination of the Cost of the Work, if applicable.

.2 AIA Document E201™–2007, Digital Data Protocol Exhibit, if completed, or the following:

« »

.3 Other documents: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents.)

« »

ARTICLE 7 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 7.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerated in Article 6 and consist of this Agreement (including, if applicable, Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to the execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. § 7.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor.


6

§ 7.3 THE WORK The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 7.4 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. § 7.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE § 7.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. § 7.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants. § 7.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmission, unless otherwise provided in the Agreement or in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 OWNER § 8.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER § 8.1.1 The Owner shall furnish all necessary surveys and a legal description of the site. § 8.1.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 8.1.3 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 9.6.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for other necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 8.2 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or repeatedly fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order is eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. § 8.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner, without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, may correct such deficiencies and may deduct the reasonable cost thereof, including Owner’s expenses and


7

compensation for the Architect’s services made necessary thereby, from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. ARTICLE 9 CONTRACTOR § 9.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 9.1.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.1.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 8.1.1, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies, or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 9.1.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 9.2 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES § 9.2.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. § 9.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 9.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 9.3.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 9.3.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 9.3.3 The Contractor may make a substitution only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Modification. § 9.4 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear under normal usage.


8

§ 9.5 TAXES The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 9.6 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS § 9.6.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as other permits, fees, licenses and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 9.7 ALLOWANCES The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall select materials and equipment under allowances with reasonable promptness. Allowance amounts shall include the costs to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts. Allowance amounts shall not include the Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. § 9.8 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES § 9.8.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. § 9.8.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedule submitted to the Owner and Architect. § 9.9 SUBMITTALS § 9.9.1 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in coordination with the Contractor’s construction schedule and in such sequence as to allow the Architect reasonable time for review. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them; (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so; and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. § 9.9.2 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. § 9.10 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 9.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.


9

§ 9.12 CLEANING UP The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material from and about the Project. § 9.13 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. § 9.14 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 9.15 INDEMNIFICATION § 9.15.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 9.15.1. § 9.15.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 9.15 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 9.15.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 10 ARCHITECT § 10.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract and will be an Owner’s representative during construction, until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. § 10.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general, if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. § 10.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or


10

charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 10.4 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Work and of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 10.5 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents and to require inspection or testing of the Work. § 10.6 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. § 10.7 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect will make initial decisions on all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and Contractor but will not be liable for results of any interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 10.8 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. § 10.9 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. ARTICLE 11 SUBCONTRACTORS § 11.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. § 11.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of the Subcontractors or suppliers for each of the principal portions of the Work. The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable written objection within ten days after receipt of the Contractor’s list of Subcontractors and suppliers. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 11.3 Contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors shall (1) require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect, and (2) allow the Subcontractor the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, has against the Owner. ARTICLE 12 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 12.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under conditions of the contract identical or substantially similar to these, including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Article 21. § 12.2 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s activities with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.


11

§ 12.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. ARTICLE 13 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 13.1 By appropriate Modification, changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. Such changes in the Work shall be authorized by written Change Order signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, or by written Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner and Architect. § 13.2 Adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual agreement of the parties or, in the case of a Construction Change Directive signed only by the Owner and Architect, by the Contractor’s cost of labor, material, equipment, and reasonable overhead and profit, unless the parties agree on another method for determining the cost or credit. Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed pursuant to the Construction Change Directive. The Architect will make an interim determination of the amount of payment due for purposes of certifying the Contractor’s monthly Application for Payment. When the Owner and Contractor agree on adjustments to the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from a Construction Change Directive, the Architect will prepare a Change Order. § 13.3 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. § 13.4 If concealed or unknown physical conditions are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or from those conditions ordinarily found to exist, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted as mutually agreed between the Owner and Contractor; provided that the Contractor provides notice to the Owner and Architect promptly and before conditions are disturbed. ARTICLE 14 TIME § 14.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 14.2 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 14.3 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 14.4 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 15.4.3. § 14.5 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by changes ordered in the Work, by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, abnormal adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor’s control, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine, subject to the provisions of Article 21. ARTICLE 15 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 15.1 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 15.1.1 Where the Contract is based on a Stipulated Sum or the Cost of the Work with a Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such


12

data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used in reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 15.1.2 With each Application for Payment where the Contract Sum is based upon the Cost of the Work, or the Cost of the Work with a Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit payrolls, petty cash accounts, receipted invoices or invoices with check vouchers attached, and any other evidence required by the Owner to demonstrate that cash disbursements already made by the Contractor on account of the Cost of the Work equal or exceed (1) progress payments already received by the Contractor, less (2) that portion of those payments attributable to the Contractor’s Fee; plus (3) payrolls for the period covered by the present Application for Payment. § 15.1.3 Payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment stored, and protected from damage, off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. § 15.1.4 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or other encumbrances adverse to the Owner’s interests. § 15.2 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 15.2.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 15.2.3. § 15.2.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 15.2.3 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 15.2.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 15.2.1. If the Contractor and the Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 9.2.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;


13

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.2.4 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 15.3 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 15.3.1 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to sub-subcontractors in similar manner. § 15.3.2 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. § 15.3.3 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 15.4.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 15.4.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.4.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. When the Architect determines that the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 15.4.4 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.5 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT § 15.5.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions stated in Section 15.5.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 15.5.2 Final payment shall not become due until the Contractor has delivered to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this Contract or receipts in full covering all labor, materials and equipment for which a lien could


14

be filed, or a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. § 15.5.3 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner except those arising from

.1 liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. § 15.5.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 16 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 16.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.

The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons and property and their protection from damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 16.1.2 and 16.1.3, except for damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 9.15. § 16.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 16.2.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents, and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay and start-up. § 16.2.2 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area, if in fact, the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 16.2.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity.


15

§ 16.2.3 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. ARTICLE 17 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 17.1 The Contractor shall purchase from, and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, insurance for protection from claims under workers’ compensation acts and other employee benefit acts which are applicable, claims for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, to property which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them. This insurance shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater, and shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 9.15. Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include: (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s Consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s completed operations. § 17.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance. § 17.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 17.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form, including builder’s risk, in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus the value of subsequent modifications and cost of materials supplied and installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 15.5 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 17.3.1 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and sub-subcontractors in the Project. § 17.3.2 The Owner shall file a copy of each policy with the Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. § 17.3.3 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 12, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to Section 17.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 12, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 17.3.4 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds


16

received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their sub-subcontractors in similar manner. § 17.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 17.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. § 17.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. ARTICLE 18 CORRECTION OF WORK § 18.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense, unless compensable under Section A.2.7.3 in Exhibit A, Determination of the Cost of the Work. § 18.2 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 9.4, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 15.4.3, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. § 18.3 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 8.3. § 18.4 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 18.5 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Article 18. ARTICLE 19 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 19.1 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract without written consent of the other, except that the Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. § 19.2 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located, except, that if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 21.4. § 19.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public


17

authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating the costs to the Contractor. § 19.4 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 19.4. ARTICLE 20 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT § 20.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR If the Architect fails to certify payment as provided in Section 15.2.1 for a period of 30 days through no fault of the Contractor, or if the Owner fails to make payment as provided in Section 4.1.3 for a period of 30 days, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages. § 20.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE § 20.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 20.2.2 When any of the above reasons exists, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have and after giving the Contractor seven days’ written notice, terminate the Contract and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 20.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 20.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 20.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. § 20.3 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. The Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ARTICLE 21 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 21.1 Claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to this Contract, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Section 16.2, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. Such matters, except those waived as provided for in Section 21.8 and Sections


18

15.5.3 and 15.5.4, shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the matter to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. § 21.2 If a claim, dispute or other matter in question relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such matter may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 21.3 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their disputes by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with their Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to this Agreement, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the binding dispute resolution but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. § 21.4 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any claim, subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association, in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of this Agreement. Demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 21.5 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation; (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact; and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 21.6 Any party to an arbitration may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described in the written Consent. § 21.7 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 21.8 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 20. Nothing contained in this Section 21.8 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.


19

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.

OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

«Brenda Allen»«, Director, Purchasing & Supply Services» « »« » (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)


20

1

SECTION 00200 –SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL PROVISIONS

The following supplements modify, change, delete or add to “Provisions of Article 7 of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner & Contractor AIA Document A107, 2007 Edition ”. Where any paragraph of the article of the agreement is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these modifications or Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of the article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect. The General provisions also may be supplemented elsewhere in the contract documents by provisions located in, but not necessarily limited to, Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specifications. ARTICLE 7 - GENERAL PROVISIONS Paragraph 7.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DELETE the first sentence of Paragraph 7.1. in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, substitute the following: [Substitute:] The Construction Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders (AIA Document A701), Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, Bid Forms, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (AIA Document A107), Bid Bond (AIA Document A310), Performance & Payment Bonds (AIA Document A312), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Special), List of Drawings, Prevailing Minimum Wage Determination, the Drawings, Specifications, all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract and all modifications thereto. ADD the following new Subparagraphs as follows: 7.1.1 Computed dimensions shall take precedence over scale dimensions, and large scale drawings shall take precedence over small scale drawings. 7.1.2 Anything shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications or mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned respectively in both. 7 . 1 . 3 Any work shown on one Drawing shall be construed to be shown in all Drawings, and the Contractor shall coordinate the Work and Drawings to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. 7.1.4 If any portion of the Contract Documents shall be in conflict with any other portion, after the application of the rules of interpretation set forth in this Paragraph 1.2, the various documents comprising the Contract Documents shall govern in the order of precedence as herein set forth according to their latest date of execution: (a) Change Orders submitted, processed and approved in accordance with applicable procedure; (b) written amendment to the various agreements (including but not limited to the Agreement) entered into or executed by the Owner; (c) the various agreements entered into and executed by the Owner, including but not limited to the Agreement (as modified by any Addenda thereto); (d) Addenda; (e)

2

Supplementary Conditions; (f) General Conditions; (g) Division 1 Specifications; (h) Instruction to Bidders; (i) Invitation to Bid; (j) Bid Form; and (k) Drawings and Specifications. In the event of an inconsistency between the Specifications and Drawings, the interpretation as determined by the Architect shall prevail; as between large scale drawings and small scale drawings, the large scale shall take precedence. Specifications having greater detail or specificity take priority over specifications of lesser detail or specificity and detail take precedence over general drawings. Paragraph 7.3 – THE WORK ADD the following to the end of the first sentence. [Add:] . . . including any subcontractor’s and sub-subcontractor’s work and material suppliers or any other entity for which the Contractor is responsible and whether on or off the site of the Project. The term “provide” includes furnishing and installing a product, complete in place, operating, tested and approved. Paragraph 9.4- Warranty ADD the following new Subparagraphs as follows: 9.4.1 The Contractor will protect both new work and existing conditions during the period of construction which may be susceptible to damage or abuse.

9.4.2 The Contractor’s performance warranty period shall be one (1) year from the date of substantial completion of the Work, except for specific items of work or equipment for which the warranty period is specified as a longer period elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

9.4.3 During the warranty period, the Contractor shall promptly correct all defects which are due to defective materials or workmanship at no cost to the Owner. Such correction shall extend to any other work damaged by such correction.

9.4.4 At the end of the 11 month period from the commencement of the warranty period, the Contractor shall schedule a walk-through inspection with the Owner and Architect to identify any warranty items to be corrected under such warranty period.

9.4.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the eleven (11) month walk-through inspection contemplated in this warranty Section. The one (1) year Contractor’s warranty period shall be extended for a period of thirty (30) days beyond the date the eleven (11) month walk- through inspection is actually performed. It is the intent of this Section to extend the warranty period by thirty (30) days beyond the date the eleven (11) month walk-through inspection is finally completed in order to give the Owner the benefit of the walk-through inspection prior to the expiration of the warranty period. The thirty (30) day extension period shall not begin to run until the final completion of the walk-through inspection. Thus, if the walk-through inspection takes more than one day to complete, the thirty (30) day extension begins to run from the date the walkthrough is actually completed. If the Owner unreasonably refuses to schedule the eleven (11) month walk-through inspection, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of a date on which the Contractor

3

shall be available to perform the walk-through inspection, which date shall not be less than ten (10) days after the date of the Contractor’s letter, and the thirty (30) day extension shall begin to run from the date of the proposed walk-through inspection. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor’s warranty expire in less than one (1) full year.

Paragraph 9.5 - Taxes

ADD the following Subparagraphs:

9.5.1 Contractor shall assume full responsibility for payment of any and all taxes which may be construed by law authority as being due for materials and supplies under any contract with the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY. They shall hold the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY safe and harmless from any liability for said taxes.

Paragraph 9.6 - Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws DELETE Subparagraph 9.6.1 and 9.6.2 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Subparagraphs: 9.6.1 The Owner shall pay for and secure only the general building permit for the Project. Other permits, licenses and the like (other than the general building permit) required by local jurisdiction or Authority to perform work in the municipality shall be obtained and secured by the General Contractor or their subcontractors for whose work it applies. 9.6.2 The Owner, through the Architect, will submit drawings and specifications to the appropriate public authorities having jurisdiction, for approval. The Owner will pay all fees for plan checking. 9.6.3 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. 9.6.4 The Owner shall not be responsible for any inspection fees due to re-inspection of rejected work due to faulty or defective workmanship of the Contractor, or scheduling error by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for all such re-inspection fees. ARTICLE 13 - CHANGES IN THE WORK DELETE Subparagraph 13.2 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Subparagraph: 13.2 Before any Change Order is prepared, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized breakdown of the cost of the proposed Change in the Work. The term “cost” shall be interpreted to mean and include the actual cost of the following: 1. Labor, including foremen. 2. Materials at cost plus applicable taxes entering permanently into the work.

4

3. Rental cost of construction plant and equipment whether rented from the Contractor or others.

4. Power and consumable supplies for the operation of power equipment. 5. Liability insurance and bonds.

6. Social security and unemployment contributions. The Contractor will be allowed fifteen percent (15%) of the total cost of the above for overhead, profit, supervision and miscellaneous expenses if they perform the work with their own forces or to the Subcontractor who performs the work. In the case where the work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor may add five percent (5%) to the Subcontractor’s total amount as the Contractor’s commission. Where Change Orders include both increases and decreases in the Contract Amount, the above fifteen percent (15%) will be allowed on the net increase only. ARTICLE 15 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Paragraph 15.1.1 Application for Payment ADD the following to the end of the last sentence: [Add:] The Schedule of Values shall be prepared in such a manner that each major item of Work and each subcontracted item of Work is shown as a line item on AIA Document G703, Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Each major item of Work shall be further broken down into separate line items for work done in each area of the building, site and each phase of construction. Each work item shall be broken down into separate line items for material and labor. Each line item shall include quantities and unit prices in such detail as required by the Architect. Paragraph 15.2 Certificates for Payment DELETE Subparagraph 15.2.1, 15.2.2,15.2.3 and 15.2.4 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Subparagraph 15.2.1 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month 15.2.2 At least fifteen (15) days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the architect, a draft copy of proposed Application for Payment for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. This draft copy may be delivered by means of a hard copy or electronics medium and if required, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers and reflecting retainage. The architect will review the application line items and render an approval or disapproval of line items within 5 days 15.2.3 The Contractor shall submit five (5) original and notarized approved requisitions to the architect for signature and submission to owner for payment processing. 15.2.4 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Work and the data comprising the

5

Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 15.2.5 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 15.2.4 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 15.2.2. If the Contractor and the Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 9.2.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 15.2.6 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 15.2.7 The Contractor hereby agrees that it will defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against any claim filed by any subcontractor by reason of the Contractor’s failure to pay the subcontractor any amount owed to such subcontractor. Any failure of the Contractor in any of its obligations in this §15.2 shall constitute a material breach of this Contract. Furthermore, the Contractor shall be obligated to pay the Owner all of the Owner’s costs incurred in defending such claim filed by the Contractor or any subcontractor. This shall include payment of all of the Owner's attorney’s fees in enforcing the Contractor's obligations hereunder.

6

15.2.8 The Owner shall retain ten percent (10%) of all amounts due the Contractor until the Work is fifty percent (50%) completed. When the Work is fifty percent (50%) completed, and only as approved by the Owner, one-half of the amount retained by the Owner shall be returned to the Contractor, provided the Contractor provides written consent of surety to such reduction in retainage to the Owner along with its Application for Payment, provided the Architect approved the application and reduction of retainage, and further provided that the Contractor is making satisfactory progress and there is no specific cause for greater withholding. 15.2.9 The Owner shall retain five percent (5%) of all amounts due the Contractor after the Work is fifty percent (50%) completed. The retained five percent (5%) will be paid on with the final Payment or as otherwise provided hereafter. In the event a dispute arises between the Owner and the Contractor, which dispute is based upon increased costs claimed by the Contractor occasioned by damages or other actions of another contractor, additional retainage, in the sum of one and one half times the amount of any possible liability, may be withheld until such time as a final resolution is agreed to by all parties directly or indirectly involved, unless the contractor causing the additional claim furnishes a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against the claim. 15.2.10 The full Contract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the Work and its progress do not remain satisfactory to the Architect or if Surety withholds its consent or for other good and sufficient reasons. ARTICLE 19 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

ADD the following new Sub- Subparagraphs:

19.5 Restrictions:

19.5.1 Potential contractors/vendors of the Board of Education of Prince George's County Schools are advised that Maryland law now provides the following mandatory restrictions on registered sex offenders performing work or services on school system property:

19.5.2 "A person who enters into a contract with a county board of education or a nonpublic school may not knowingly employ an individual to work at a school if the individual is a registrant. A person who violates this section is guilty of a misdemeanor and on conviction is subject to imprisonment not exceeding 5 years or a fine not exceeding $5,000 or both."

19.5.3 Persons or entities awarded contracts with the Board of Education of Prince George's County are required to certify that no employee, subcontractor, subcontractor employee, or material supplier that is a registered sex offender will be allowed to enter onto school system property at any time in the performance of the work or services for which the contract is awarded. Such certification is a condition precedent to any contract award, and failure to so certify will be grounds for not awarding a contract. It will be the responsibility of contractors to obtain similar certification from all sub-contractors and material suppliers performing work or services on school system property and to monitor adherence to this requirement. In the event that the Board of Education of Prince George's County determines that a registered sex offender has entered upon school system property in the performance of work for a contractor/vendor, such will be grounds for termination of the contract.

7

19.6 Criminal Background Check/Photo Identification Badge:

19.6.1 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that its employees, agents, volunteers, and sub-contractors who have contact with students be fingerprinted and have a background check in compliance with Title 5, Subtitle 5, Part VI, of the Family Law Article of the Maryland Code.

A. Employees Having Direct Contact with Students:

Any and all current and future employees of Consultant/Contractors who may have direct contact with students must have a criminal background check and fingerprinting conducted by the Finger Printing Office of the Board before 14 days before beginning work. Previous background checks will not be accepted. The fee for the background check shall be paid by the Consultant/Contractors by check or money order at the time the fingerprinting is performed. No employee can begin work in a PGCPS Schools until results have been received. Violation of this provision may result in Termination for Cause.

B. Employees Do Not Have Direct Contact With Students:

Employees of Consultant/Contractor who will be placed in a PGCPS Schools but will not have direct contact with students must have on record a Criminal Justice Information Service (CJIS) and NCIC background checks. Copies of the background checks must be forwarded to the Contract Officer before services can commence. Every two years the Consultant shall submit copies of background checks to the Contract Officer. Should any employee be flagged during the term of this agreement, the Consultant shall contact the Contract Officer within 24 hours of notification. Violation of this provision may result in Termination for Cause.

C. Employment of Child Sex Offenders:

The Consultant/Contractor shall at all times be compliant with the Criminal Procedure Article of Annotated Code of Maryland Section 11-722 that states that a person who enters a contract with a County Board of Education or a nonpublic school may not knowingly employ an individual to work at a school if the individual is a registered child sex offender. If a registered child sex offender is employed by the Consultant/Contractor, the Consultant/Contractor is prohibited from assigning that employee to perform management, delivery, installation, repair, construction or any other type of services on any The Board property. Violation of this provision may result in Termination for Cause.

Paragraph 19.7 – Liquidated Damages for Delays

19.7.1 The amount of Liquidated Damages shall be $2,500 per calendar day. 19.7.2 The damages incurred by the Owner due to the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work, or portions thereof, designated in the Project Schedule as a Milestone by the Contract Time or the Specific Dates, including any extensions thereof under the Contract Documents, shall be in the amount set forth in the Contract Documents for each consecutive calendar day beyond each Specific Date (Sunday and all holidays included) for which the Contractor shall fail to complete the Work or designated portion thereof designated in the Project Schedule as a Milestone.

8

19.7.3 The amount of liquidated damages provided in the Contract Documents shall not be considered a penalty and shall compensate the Owner only for the Owner’s inability to use or otherwise have available, the Project or any portion thereof for its intended purpose by the Dates set forth in the Contract Documents.

19.7.4 If, during the course of the Contractor’s performance of the Work, the Contractor fail to complete the Work, or portions thereof, in accordance with Specific Dates or the Contract Time, the Owner may retain the estimated amount of liquidated damages for which the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner under the Contract Documents, from amounts which become payable or are otherwise certified as payable to the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

19.8 Availability of county resident manpower 19.9.1 The Owner encourages but does not require that laborers and mechanics employed on the project be residents of Prince Georges County. The Contractor and sub-contractors shall be licensed in accordance with all applicable requirements of Prince Georges County.

END OF SECTION

1

SECTION 00451

STATE OF MARYLAND ANTI-BRIBERY AFFIDAVIT

I HEREBY CERTIFY that

1. I am the _______________________ and the duly authorized representative of the firm of

_____________________________________ whose address is_____________________,

and that I possess the legal authority to make this affidavit on behalf of myself and the firm for

which I am acting.

2. Except as described in paragraph 3 below, neither I, nor to the best of my knowledge, the firm,

nor any of its officers, directors, or partners, or any of its employees directly involved in

obtaining contracts with the State or any county, bi-county, or multi-county agency, or

subdivision of the State have been convicted of, or have pleaded nolo contrendre to a charge of,

or have during the course of official investigation or other proceeding admitted in writing or

under oath acts or omissions committed after July 1, 1997, which constitute bribery, attempted

bribery, or conspiracy to bribe under the provisions of Article 27 of the Annotated Code of

Maryland or under the laws of any state or federal government.

3. (State “none” or, as appropriate, list any conviction, please, or admission described in

paragraph 2 above, with the date; court, official, or administrative body; and the sentence or

disposition, if any.)

______________________________________________________________________

I acknowledge that this affidavit is to be furnished to the requesting agency, to the Secretary of

Budget and Fiscal Planning of Maryland, and, where appropriate, to the Board of Public Works

and the Attorney General under 16-202, S.F. of the Annotated Code of Maryland. I acknowledge

that if the representatives set forth in this affidavit are not true and correct, the State may

terminate any contract awarded and take any other appropriate action. I further acknowledge that

I am executing this affidavit in compliance with 16-203, S.F. of the Annotated Code of

Maryland, which provides certain persons who have been convicted or have admitted to bribery,

attempted bribery, or conspiracy to bribe may be disqualified, either by operation or law or after

a hearing, from entering into contracts with the State or any of its agencies or subdivisions.

I do solemnly declare and affirm under the penalties of perjury that the contents of this affidavit

are true and correct.

_______________________________ __________________________

Witness Signature Date

ANTI-BRIBERY AFFIDAVIT

1

SECTION 00452 – STATE OF MARYLAND TAX CERTIFICATION

At the time of bid or proposal for a State procurement contract of $10,000 or more is submitted, the bidder or offeror shall certify to the procurement officer that the bidder or offeror has paid all taxes, unemployment insurance contribution, reimbursement payments, and interest not barred by limitations and payable to the comptroller, the Department of Assessments and Taxation or the Department of Economic and Employment Development or has provided for payment in a manner satisfactory to the unit responsible for collection; and if the bidder or offeror is a vendor of tangible personal property, the bidder or offeror possesses a valid sales and use tax license under Title 11, Subtitle 7 of the Tax General Article. I acknowledge that this certificate is to be furnished to the requesting agency, and to the Comptroller of the Treasury, Sales and Use Tax Division under 13-222, S.F. of the Annotated Code of Maryland. I acknowledge that, if the representations set forth in this certificate are not true and correct, the State may terminate any contract awarded and take any other appropriate action. I do solemnly declare and affirm under the penalties of perjury that the contents of this certificate are true and correct. ________________________________ ___________________________________ Witness Signature _____________________________________ ___________________________________ Name (please type or print) Name (please type or print)

_____________________________________ ______________________________________

Title (please type or print) Title (please type or print)

TAX CERTIFICATION

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 00500-1

SECTION 00500 – INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS Delete 11.1, 11.2, 11.3 and 11.4 (of the General Conditions) in their entirety and substitute the following: 11.1 - General Insurance Requirements 11.1.1 - The Contractor shall not commence Work until the Contractor has obtained at the Contractor's own expense all of the insurance as required hereunder and such insurance has been approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence work on any subcontract until all insurance required of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved by the Contractor. Approval of insurance required of the Contractor will be granted only after submission to the Owner of original certificates of insurance signed by authorized representatives of the insurers or, at the Owner's request, certified copies of the required insurance policies. Additionally, the Contractor must submit with the original certificates or certified policies, the enclosed Contractor’s Insurance Checklist form completed by the Contractor and each of the Contractor’s Insurance Agents or Contractor’s Insurers (one form for each agent or insurer if multiple agents or insurers write the Contractor’s coverage). 11.1.2 - Insurance as required hereunder shall be in force throughout the term of the Contract and for two years after final acceptance of the Project by Owner in accordance with 11.3.1.1.iv. Original certificates signed by authorized representatives of the insurers or, at the Owner's request, certified copies of insurance policies, evidencing that the required insurance is in effect, shall be maintained with the Owner throughout the term of the Contract and for two years after final acceptance of the Project by Owner. 11.1.3 - The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors to maintain during the term of the Contract commercial general liability insurance, business auto liability insurance, and workers compensation and employers liability insurance to the same extent required of the Contractor in 11.3.1.1, 11.3.1.2 and 11.3.1.3 unless any such requirement is expressly waived or amended by the Owner in writing. The Contractor shall furnish Subcontractors' certificates of insurance to the Owner immediately upon request. 11.1.4 - All insurance policies required hereunder shall be endorsed to provide that the policy is not subject to cancellation, non-renewal or material reduction in coverage until sixty (60) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. Therefore, the phrases "endeavor to" and "... but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon the company, its agents or representatives" are to be eliminated from the cancellation provision of standard ACORD certificates of insurance.


11.1.5 - No acceptance and/or approval of any insurance by the Owner shall be construed as relieving or excusing the Contractor or the Contractor's Surety from any liability or obligation imposed upon either or both of them by the provisions of this Contract. 11.1.6 - If the Contractor does not meet the insurance requirements of this Contract, the Contractor shall forward a written request to the Owner for a waiver in writing of the insurance requirement(s) not met or approval in writing of alternate insurance coverage, self-insurance, or group self-insurance arrangements. If the Owner denies the request, the Contractor must comply with the insurance requirements as specified in this Contract. 11.1.7 - All required insurance coverage must be underwritten by insurers allowed to do business in the State of Maryland and acceptable to the Owner. The insurers must also have a policyholders' rating of "A-" or better, and a financial size of "Class VII" or better in the latest evaluation by A. M. Best Company, unless Owner grants specific approval for an exception. The Owner hereby grants specific approval for the acquisition of workers compensation and employers liability insurance from the Injured Workers Insurance Fund of Maryland. 11.1.8 - Any deductibles or retentions in excess of $10,000 shall be disclosed by the Contractor, and are subject to Owner's written approval. Any deductible or retention amounts elected by the Contractor or imposed by the Contractor's insurer(s) shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 11.1.9 - Any and all return premiums and/or dividends for insurance or coverage directly charged to the Owner by the Contractor in connection with this Contract shall belong to and be payable to the Owner. 11.1.10 - If the Owner is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Contractor to purchase and maintain insurance as described and required herein, without so notifying the Owner, then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.2 – Owner's Liability Insurance 11.2.1 - The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance, or solely at the Owner's option, the Owner may self-insure the Owner's liability exposures. 11.3 - Contractor's Liability Insurance 11.3.1 - The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the following insurance coverage which will insure against claims which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Insurance shall be written for not less than the limits specified below or required by law, whichever is greater. 11.3.1.1 - Commercial general liability insurance or its equivalent for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage including loss of use, with minimum limits of:


$ 1,000,000 each occurrence; $ 1,000,000 personal and advertising injury; $ 2,000,000 general aggregate; and $ 2,000,000 products/completed operations aggregate.

This insurance shall include coverage for all of the following:

i. General aggregate limit applying on a per project basis; ii. Liability arising from premises and operations; iii. Liability arising from the actions of independent contractors; iv. Liability arising from products and completed operations with such coverage to be maintained for two years after completion of the Work; v. Contractual liability including protection for the Contractor from bodily injury and property damage claims arising out of liability assumed under this Contract; and vi. Liability arising from the explosion, collapse, or underground (XCU) hazards.

11.3.1.2 - Business auto liability insurance or its equivalent with a minimum limit of $1,000,000 per accident and including coverage for all of the following:

i. Liability arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any auto; and ii. Automobile contractual liability.

11.3.1.3 - Workers compensation insurance or its equivalent with statutory benefits as required by any state or Federal law, including standard "other states" coverage; employers liability insurance or its equivalent with minimum limits of:

$ 100,000 each accident for bodily injury by accident; $ 100,000 each employee for bodily injury by disease; and $ 500,000 policy limit for bodily injury by disease.

11.3.1.4 - Contractors pollution liability insurance or its equivalent for bodily injury, property damage, including loss of use, and cleanup costs on and off the Project site, with minimum limits of:

$ 1,000,000 each pollution incident; and $ 2,000,000 annual aggregate.

11.3.1.5 - Umbrella excess liability or excess liability insurance or its equivalent with minimum limits of:

$ 5,000,000 per occurrence; $ 5,000,000 aggregate for other than products/completed operations and auto liability; and $ 5,000,000 products/completed operations aggregate

and including all of the following coverage on the applicable schedule of underlying insurance: i. Commercial general liability;


ii. Business auto liability; and iii. Employer’s liability.

11.3.1.6 - Owner and Owner's elected and appointed officials, officers, consultants, agents and employees shall be named as additional insured on the Contractor's commercial general liability insurance and umbrella excess or excess liability insurance policies with respect to liability arising out of the Contractor's work under this Contract. Such coverage shall extend to cover the additional insured(s) for liability arising out of the following:

i. On-going operations; and ii. Completed operations.

The commercial general liability policy and the umbrella excess liability or excess liability policies, if required herein, must include additional insured language, which shall afford liability coverage for the exposures listed above in i. and ii. Special Note: Policies endorsed with the following combinations of ISO forms shall be acceptable: • CG 2010 entitled “Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors – Scheduled Person or Organization” and CG 2037 entitled “Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors – Completed Operations”; OR • CG 2033 entitled “Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - Automatic Status When Required in Construction Agreement with You” and CG 2037 entitled “Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors – Completed Operations”. Both endorsements are required to afford coverage to the additional insured for both on-going operations and completed operations. Additionally, the schedules on these endorsements must properly reference the Owner and Owner's elected and appointed officials, officers, consultants, agents and employees. 11.3.1.7 - Insurance or self-insurance provided to the Owner and Owner's elected and appointed officials, officers, consultants, agents and employees under any Contractor's liability insurance or self-insurance required herein, including, but not limited to, umbrella and excess liability or excess liability policies, shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of insurance or self-insurance. (Any cross suits or cross liability exclusion shall be deleted from Contractor's liability insurance policies required herein.) 11.3.1.8 - Insurance or self-insurance provided to the Owner and Owner's elected and appointed officials, officers, consultants, agents and employees as specified herein shall be primary, and any other insurance, self-insurance, coverage or indemnity available to the Owner and Owner's elected and appointed officials, officers, consultants, agents and employees shall be excess of


and non-contributory with insurance or self-insurance provided to the Owner and Owner's elected and appointed officials, officers, consultants, agents and employees as specified herein. 11.3.2 - If any liability insurance purchased by the Contractor has been issued on a "claims made" basis, the Contractor must comply with the following additional conditions:

i. The Contractor shall agree to provide certificates of insurance evidencing the above coverage for a period of two years after final payment for the Contract. Such certificates shall evidence a retroactive date no later than the beginning of the Work under this Contract; or ii. The Contractor shall purchase an extended (minimum two years) reporting period endorsement for each such "claims made" policy in force as of the date of final acceptance and evidence the purchase of this extended reporting period endorsement by means of a certificate of insurance or a copy of the endorsement itself. Such certificate or copy of the endorsement shall evidence a retroactive date no later than the beginning of the Work under this Contract.

11.4 - Builders Risk Insurance 11.4.1 - The Contractor shall purchase and maintain builders risk insurance on a replacement cost basis with a limit at least equal to the initial Contract Sum. This insurance shall be maintained until final acceptance of the Project by the Owner or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the covered property, whichever is earlier. This builder’s risk insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. 11.4.2 - Insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire, extended coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse and windstorm. Coverage is to apply for debris removal including demolition occasioned by a covered loss. This insurance shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such covered loss. Coverage for other perils such as flood and earthquake or for loss caused by the enforcement of any applicable ordinance or law shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract. 11.4.3 - This builder’s risk insurance shall cover all of the following types of property:

i. All structures to be constructed, under construction, and/or already constructed which are part of the Project; ii. All materials, equipment, machinery and supplies which are to be incorporated into the Project; iii. Temporary structures of any nature whatsoever; and iv. Underground property, including but not limited to, foundations, pump stations, pumps, pipes, drains, tanks and connections.

11.4.4 - The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of any deductibles applicable under this builders risk insurance, boiler and machinery insurance or other property insurance applicable to the Project.


11.4.5 - Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, this builders risk insurance shall cover materials to be incorporated into the Project which are off the site, and also such materials in transit. 11.4.6 - This builders risk insurance shall insure (or shall be amended to insure) against loss or damage caused by the boiler and machinery perils with limits and scope of coverage that are deemed by the Owner to be satisfactory. This insurance shall also include the interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. 11.4.7 - The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and against the Architect, Owner's other Contractors and own forces described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, elected and appointed officials, officers, agents, employees and consultants of any of them, for property damage to or loss of use of the Work to the extent that such property damage or loss of use is covered by this builders risk insurance, boiler and machinery insurance or other property insurance applicable to the Work. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.4.8 - Any loss covered under this builders risk insurance, boiler and machinery insurance or other property insurance applicable to the Work shall be payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insured, as their interests may appear, subject to any mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 11.4.9 - Owner, as fiduciary, shall have the power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers. 11.4.10 -Partial occupancy or use in accordance with the provisions of the Contract that pertain to partial occupancy or use shall not commence until the builders risk insurer has granted permission by endorsement or otherwise for the Owner to partially occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage of construction. The Owner and Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain such permission. 11.4.11 -The insurance required by this Paragraph 11.4 is not intended to cover machinery, tools or equipment owned or rented by the Contractor, or its Subcontractors, which are utilized in the performance of the Work but not incorporated into the permanent improvements. The Contractor and its Subcontractors shall, at their own expense, purchase and maintain property insurance coverage for owned, leased or rented machinery, tools or equipment. The Contractor, and its Subcontractors, hereby waive all rights against the Owner and its elected and appointed officials, officers, agents, employees and consultants for property damage to or loss of use of such machinery, tools or equipment to the extent that such property damage or loss of use is covered by the Contractor's or Subcontractor's property or equipment floater insurance or other similar property insurance maintained by the Contractor or its Subcontractors. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.

PGCPS Allowance 01210 Page 1

SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 Summary - A "Schedule of Allowances," showing amounts included in Contract Sum, is included in this section. Coordinate allowance to ensure that each section is completely integrated and interfaced. Requirements for allowances are shown and specified to extent established by date of Contract Documents; additional requirements will be established by Change Order. At earliest possible date, advise Architect/Engineer of date each final allowance selection must be completed. Submit proposals for allowance Work as directed and in manner specified for Change Orders. Indicate quantities, unit costs, total purchase amounts, taxes, delivery charges and trade discounts. Where requested, furnish a detailed breakdown of quantity survey. Contractor mark-up of overrun of allowance purchases will be permitted where purchase amount exceeds established allowance by more than 15%; otherwise, and except as otherwise indicated, amount of Change Order on each allowance will be the difference between purchase amount and allowance. Deliver excess materials of allowance Work to Owner's storage space, or dispose of by other means as directed. Designate in project construction schedule delivery dates for products and services specified under each allowance. Contingency allowances may be drawn upon in accordance with guidelines put forth in Article 7, Changes in the Work, of General Conditions.

1.2 SECTION

INCLUDES A.

Cash allowances.

1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES

A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts, less cost of delivery to site, less applicable taxes.

B. Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. 2. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 3. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects.

Submit claims for transportation damage. 4. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.

1.4 FORM OF PAYMENT

A. Payment for allowance items shall be made regularly by Contractor to suppliers of allowance

items as work progresses. Contractor shall invoice for allowance items through periodic applications for payment as Work progresses.

1.5 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE

A. Owner’s Charge Order Allowance to be used by PGCPS for unforeseen conditions. Allowance

to be included in Contractor’s base bid is $100,000.00. 1. This amount will be utilized for unforeseen conditions to cover extra labor and

material costs, if any, and shall be tracked separately from other contract costs. All mark-up, including general conditions, overhead, profit, etc., for this allowance shall be included in the base bid. No additional or credited markup will be allowed for extra work paid for by this allowance.

PGCPS Allowance 01210 Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT

USED PART 3 EXECUTION -

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

PGCPS Contract Modification Spec 01260 Page 1

SECTION 01260 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing minor

changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue through Construction Manager a

detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect through Construction Manager are

not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a

quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."

f. Maximum Contractors markup (OH & Profit) shall be limited to 8% of the cost of the work associated with the change order.

g. Provide all supplier, subcontractor, manufacturer, etc backup to substantiate the proposed cost.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Construction Manager. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

PGCPS Contract Modification Spec 01260 Page 2

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

5. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."

6. Maximum Contractors markup (OH & Profit) shall be limited to 8% of the cost of the work associated with the change order.

7. Provide all supplier, subcontractor, manufacturer, etc backup to substantiate the proposed cost.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Construction Manager

will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included in Project Manual.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue through Construction Manager a

Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the

Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS Department of Capital Programs

PGCPS Unit Pricing 01270 Page 1

SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section “Contract Modification Procedures” for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

2. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for general testing and inspecting requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price No. 1: Self-Leveling Concrete Underlayment:

1. Description: Provide self-leveling concrete underlayment to new or existing concrete floor slabs not conforming to flat- and level-requirements, including shot-blast preparation of concrete in accordance with Division 03 Section “Hydraulic Cement Underlayment.” not otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. Unit of Measurement: Square feet of self-leveling concrete underlayment.

3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment requirements of Division 01 Section “Allowances.”

B. Unit Price No. 2: Additional Duplex Receptacle Outlet:

1. Description: Duplex receptacle outlet according to Specification Section 16143.

2. Unit of Measurement: Each.

C. Unit Price No. 3: Additional Data Outlet:

1. Description: Data outlet according to Specification Section 16121.


D. Unit Price No. 4: Additional Telephone Outlet:

1. Description: Telephone outlet according to Specification Section 16121.


E. Unit Price No. 5: Additional Video Outlet:

1. Description: Video outlet according to Specification Section 16780.


F. Unit Price No. 6: Additional Public Address Speaker:

1. Description: Public address speaker according to Specification Section 16770.


G. Unit Price No. 7: Additional Security Camera (Interior):

1. Description: Interior security camera according to Specification Section 16791.


H. Unit Price No. 8: Additional Security Camera (Exterior):

1. Description: Exterior security camera according to Specification Section 16791.


I. Unit Price No. 9: Additional Security Motion Detector:

1. Description: Interior security camera according to Specification Section 16791.


J. Unit Price No. 10: Additional Wireless Access Point Data Outlet:



1. Description: Wireless access point data outlet according to Specification Section 16790.


K. Unit Price No. 11: Repairing/Replacing of Existing Face Masonry:

1. Description: Cutting out of existing face masonry at [non-composite cavity] masonry veneer construction, removal as required, and subsequent replacement with [matching] face masonry in accordance with “Cutting and Patching” provisions Division 01 Section “Execution Requirements” and Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry Assemblies.”

2. Unit of Measurement: Square feet of face masonry veneer.

END OF SECTION 01270

PGCPS Regulatory Requirements Section 01410 -1

SECTION 01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General: Comply with the applicable Articles and Sections of the Annotated Code of

Maryland.

B. General Safety and Health Regulations.

C. Discrimination

D. Environmental Statutes and Regulations

E. Miscellaneous Regulations.

1. Buy American Steel Act 2. Financial Disclosure 3. Political Contribution Disclosure 4. Retention of Records

1.3 GENERAL SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS.

A. The use of products containing asbestos will not be permitted.

B. Nothing contained in the Contract shall be construed as relieving Contractor in any way of Contractor's responsibility for strict compliance with all governmental requirements, pertaining to health and safety.

C. The Contract is to be governed at all times by applicable provisions of federal law,

including but not limited to the following:

1. Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Public Law 91-596. 2. Part 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XIII of Title 29,

Code of Federal Regulations 3. Maryland State Safety Health Act (MOSHA)

D. Project safety procedures/policies for construction activities shall be adhered to at

all times. Refer to PART 3 - EXECUTION for further safety information and requirements.


1.4 DISCRIMINATION

A. The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant because of race, creed, color or national origin. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color or national origin. Such action shall include but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be provide by the Owner concerning discrimination.

B. The Contractor shall send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he

has collective bargaining agreements or contract or understanding a notice to be provided by the Owner advising the said union or worker's representative of the Contractor's commitments under this section, and the Contractor shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.

C. The Contractor shall furnish, if requested by the Owner a compliance report concerning

their employment practices and policies in order for the Owner to ascertain compliance with the special provisions of this contract concerning discrimination in employment.

D. In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clause of this

contract, this contract maybe canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared in eligible for further Prince George's County Public School work.

E. The Contractor shall include the special provisions outlined herein, pertaining to

nondiscrimination in employment in every subcontract or purchase order utilized by him in order to carry out the terms and conditions of this contract. So that such nondiscrimination in employment provisions shall be binding on each subcontract.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal and state laws dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of natural resources, including but not limited to the Federal Air Quality Act of 1967; the Clean Air Act; the Clean Water Restoration act; the Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1956; the Water Quality Act of 1965; the Water Quality Improvement Act of 1970; the Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972; the Water Facilities Act (see Consolidated Farmer's Home Administration Act of 1961); the Watershed Protection and Flood Prevention Act; the Clean Streams Law; the Solid Waste Management Act; the Municipal Waste Planning, Recycling and Waste Reduction Act; A.H.E.R.A; and all rules and regulations thereunder, including but not limited to, those formulated by the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the Maryland Department of the Environment. Nothing contained in the Contract shall be construed as relieving Contractor in any way of Contractor's responsibility for strict compliance with all governmental requirements pertaining to environmental protection.

B. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents for construction shall be construed by the

Contractor as relieving him in any way of his responsibility for strict compliance with the


statues, rules and regulations contained in the above mentioned Environmental Protection Act.

1.6 MISCELLANEOUS REGULATIONS

A. MARYLAND BUY AMERICAN STEEL ACT: The Contractor shall comply with Section 17-301 through Section 17-306 of Annotated Code of Maryland, State Finance and Procurement Article. The "Buy American Steel" Act of Maryland defines "steel products" as any product: "rolled, formed, shaped, drawn, extruded, forged, cast, fabricated, or otherwise similarly processed, or processed by a combination of two or more of such operations, from steel made in the United States by the open hearth, basic oxygen, electric furnace, bessemer, or other steel making process."

B. FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE: The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section

13-221 of the State Finance and Procurement Article, Annotated Code of Maryland. Every business that enters into contracts, leases, or other agreements, with that State of Maryland or its agencies, during a calendar year under which the business is to receive in the aggregate $100,000 or more, shall within 30 days of the time when aggregate value of these contracts, leases to other agreements reached $100,000, file with the Secretary of State of Maryland certain specified information to include disclosure of beneficial ownership of the business.

C. POLITICAL CONTRIBUTION DISCLOSURE: The Contractor shall comply with the

provisions of Article 33, Section 30-1 through 30-4 the Annotated Code of Maryland, which requires that every person that enters into contracts , leases, or other agreements with the State of Maryland during a calendar year under which the business is to receive in the aggregate $10,000 or more, shall on or before February 1, of the following year file with the Secretary of State of Maryland certain specified information to include disclosure of political contributions in excess of $100 to a candidate for elective office in any primary or general election.

D. RETENTION OF RECORDS: The Contractor shall retain and maintain all records

and documents relating to this contract for three years after final payment by the Owner or any applicable statute of limitations, whichever is longer, and shall make them available for inspection and audit by the Owners authorized representatives at all times.

E. DRUGS, TOBACCO AND ALCOHOL: All of the School properties are "drug,

tobacco, and alcohol free zones" as designated by state and local laws. Neither the Contractor nor any of his employees or subcontractors are permitted to have any drugs, tobacco, or alcohol products on school property. Use or possession of such items on school properties will result in immediate termination of the Contract.

Upon termination of the contract, the contractor will be paid for all services performed to date but will not be paid for any lost or anticipated profits due to termination of the Contract. The Contractor will be removed from all bids with the Prince George's County Public Schools for a period not to exceed two years. Prince George's County Public Schools will provide an unsatisfactory reference when inquiries are made.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. All work shall be performed in accordance with rules, regulations, procedures and safe practices and/or OSHA and all other Government agencies having jurisdiction over the project.

B. MARYLAND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH (MOSH) REQUIREMENTS

All contracts with the BOARD OF EDUCATION OF PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY shall be governed by the STATE OF MARYLAND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (MOSH) LAWS. Where any difference(s) may exist between any particular MOSH standard(s) and the corresponding, related United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standard(s), MOSH LAW SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE.

1. Information pertaining to any particular MOSH Law(s) may be obtained from:

STATE OF MARYLAND DEPARTMENT OF LICENSING AND REGULATION Division of Labor and Industry/Maryland Occupational Safety and Health 1100 North Eutaw Street Baltimore, Maryland 21202 Telephone No.: 410-767-2215

3.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS:

A. Each Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the work.

B. All Contractors shall comply with the provisions of the "Occupational Safety and Health

Act" and Federal, State and local requirements.

C. If a Contractor fails to maintain the safety precautions required by law or directed by authorities having jurisdiction, the Owner may take such action as necessary and charge the Contractor therefore. The failure of the Owner to take any such action shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations.

D. The Contractor individually shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy

of his plant, appliances, and methods and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction, maintenance or operation.

E. Prior to mobilizing to the job, the Contractor shall submit, in writing, a description of his

safety program. During the conduct of the work, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and Architect in writing of all accidents and shall submit a written report describing in detail the circumstances of each accident within 24'hours of its occurrence. All Contractors shall notify the Architect of any flammable, combustible and/or toxic


materials intended for use on the project and shall furnish literature pertinent to the use and control of all materials, including, but not limited to M.S.D.S. sheets.

F. Each Contractor shall delegate one representative who shall be responsible to maintain

all safety requirements of the Contractor.

3.3 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY:

A. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage or loss to:

1. All school personnel, employees on the work site and all other persons who may

be affected thereby.

2. All the work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub-Subcontractors.

3. Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including but not limited to trees,

shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction and underground property.

B. The Contractor shall give all notices and 'comply with all applicable laws, ordinances,

rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority, including the Owner's requirements bearing on the Safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.

C. The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress

of the work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including danger signs and other warnings against hazards.

D. The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property caused in

whole or in part by the Contractor, his Subcontractors, his Sub-Subcontractors, or anyone directly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them be liable.

E. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the work to be loaded so as to

endanger its integrity and safety.

F. Contractors using a method of blasting to perform work on the project shall use all proper methods, including adequate safety matting and/or overburden, progressive time sequences and scaled distances, in accordance with all governmental regulations.

G. The use of audio equipment and headsets will not be permitted on the construction site.

3.4 PERSONAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS


A. All persons entering the project shall wear hard hats in good condition and meet ANSI 289.11997. Hard hats shall be worn in the proper manner.

B. All persons entering the project 'shall wear proper work boots, clothing and attire

including long trousers and shirts. No obscene or inappropriate messages may be displayed on clothing. What constitutes obscene or inappropriate will be at the sole discretion of the Owner.

C. All job site personnel are expected to strictly adhere to the following rules and

regulations:

1. Use of approved eye protection by all Contractor personnel shall be required during all types of percussion and reciprocating work or when other requirements govern.

2. Approved respiratory equipment shall be worn by all personnel exposed to

hazardous volumes of toxic or noxious dusts, fumes, mists, or gases.

3. Personal protective equipment is to be used under unusual conditions, such as high temperature work, handling caustic or corrosive liquids, or molten metals.

4. The Contractor is responsible for providing safety training to all of his employees. 5. All shipments to the site shall have the required documentation and labels

attached and the documentation and labels shall be maintained while the material is on site.

6. As defined in the occupational Safety & Health Act, safety belts, complete with

lanyards, or parachute-style harness, complete with lanyard, are to be used where there is a danger of falling.

3.5 HOUSEKEEPING

A. Materials and equipment must be piled up or stored in a safe manner. Aisles must be

kept clear.

B. All drop cables/extension cords shall be elevated above the ground or protected in such a way to allow traffic to pass.

C. Consumption of food and beverages shall be in designated areas and at specified times.

D. Glass-bottled refreshments will not be allowed in the workplace.

E. Welding stubs and shells from explosive activated tools shall be collected and properly disposed of by Contractor.

F. The cords and connections at temporary panels must be maintained in an orderly

fashion at all times to prevent tripping.

G. Nails are to be bent over and/or removed from wood.

H. Aisles, stairwells and base areas of ladders are to be kept clear at all times.


3.6 M.S.D.S.-CONTROLLED PRODUCTS

A. The Contractor is responsible for notifying the Owner, of any controlled products that they bring or cause to have brought onto the site. The Contractor shall submit copies of the Material Safety Data Sheet (M.S.D.S.) for the controlled product, and the Contractor shall retain a copy of the M.S.D.S. on site for their own reference. The legal storage, use, and disposal of any controlled product is the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall comply with OSHA Communications' Standards 29 CFR 1910-

1200 for hazardous materials. The Contractor shall maintain a Material Safety Data Sheet on file at the jobsite for each chemical brought to the site.

C. Temporary storage of hazardous materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

Final cleanup and removal shall be by the Contractor.

3.7 EMERGENCIES

A. In any emergency affecting the safety or persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss and shall immediately notify the Owner and Architect of such emergency conditions. Any claims made by the Contractor for additional compensation or extension of time on account of emergency work shall be processed in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.

END OF SECTION

PGCPS Temporary Project Signage Spec 01581 Page 1

SECTION 01581 - TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. State Construction Sign.

B. Prince Georges County Supplemental Sign

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr wind velocity.

B. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of

construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawing: Show content, layout, lettering, color .

1.4 MARYLAND CORRECTIONAL ENTERPRISES

A. MCE Sign Plant; C/O Patuxent Institution; Attn: Charles Behnke, Plant Manager; 7555 Waterloo

Road; Jessup, MD 20794 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.

B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch thick,

standard large sizes to minimize joints.

C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.

D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats. 2.2 STATE CONSTRUCTION SIGN

A. Size: As indicated on attachment. 72" x 96"

B. Mounting: Freestanding.

C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: As dictated by the State of Maryland.

1. Use model diagram included at the end of this Section. Verify content with Owner prior to sign fabrication.

2.3 PRINCE GEORGES COUNTY SUPPLEMENTAL SIGN

A. Size: 24 x 96 inches.

PGCPS Temporary Project Signage Spec 01581 Page 2

B. Mounting: Mounted on same sign posts as State Construction Sign

C. Content: 1. County Executive: Name and Title. 2. County Commissioners: Names and Titles. 3. Board of Education Members: Names and Titles.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install state construction sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to

Proceed. B. Erect at designated location.

C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings.

D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor

securely. E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage. 3.3 REMOVAL

A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore

the area.

E-1a Revised 03/2015

APPENDIX E FOR SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION SIGN The following appropriate language should be entered on the construction sign to describe the work for the specific project (or modified as required):

• Renovating

• Constructing an Addition and Renovating

• Constructing an Addition to

• Constructing a Replacement School for

• Constructing the New

• Constructing a Prekindergarten Addition at

• Renovating the Science Laboratories at

• Replacing the Roof at

• Replacing the Boilers at

• Replacing the Windows at

• Replacing the (other systemic) at

APPENDIX E

CONSTRUCTION SIGN FOR STATE FUNDED

SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

E-1 Revised 03/2015


SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 1000 – SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all labor, new materials, tools, equipment, supplies and services for all work as indicated, in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary,

miscellaneous, incidental items, tests and inspections, appurtenances and devices incidental to, or necessary for, a sound, secure and complete installation.

C. The Work shall be complete, and all work, materials, and services not expressly called for in the Specifications which may be necessary for complete and proper construction to carry out the Contract in good faith, shall be performed, furnished, and installed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Qualified, careful and experienced workers shall execute the Work in the best and most workmanlike manner.

D. Working hours:

1. Normal working hours shall be 6:30am to 5:30pm Monday thru Friday.

2. Weekend work is permitted and shall require forty-eight hours notice to the Owner.

3. Noise producing and after hours work that is disruptive to the neighborhood shall occur

only after at least seventy-two hours advance notice is given to the Owner and the Owner has approved the request.”

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. This project consists of the demolition and renovation of approximately 2,300 SF of building area as shown on the contract documents. The project is Parkdale High School in Prince George County Maryland and is located at 6001 Good Luck Road, Riverdale, MD 20737.

B. Parkdale High School renovation includes modifications to a number of rooms to accommodate one Academy:

1. Military Science

C. An Educational Specification was developed for each Academy, and together with Prince George’s County Public Schools administration and local Principals, rooms were identified in a 2013 Master Plan as being suitable to teach the educational program for each Academy. The Schematic Design included in this report illustrates the work proposed to each of the rooms to be modified as well as a small addition. The work originally identified was budgeted based on:

1. Maintenance work 2. Minimal Renovation 3. Major Renovation 4. New Construction


SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00-2 4/20/2016

D. The work in most of the rooms used for Global Studies involves only “Minimal Renovation” including adding new smartboards with power and data, new tackboards and whiteboards, new casework, paint walls, and a new door between classrooms.

1. Room 5 2. Room 7

E. The summary of Work described herein is an overall summary of the responsibilities of the

Contractor and his relation to the Owner. It does not supersede the specific requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Work and equipment provided by Owner: The Owner may furnish certain items of equipment to Contractor for installation under this Contract. These items shall be as indicated on the drawings and numbered for identification purposes. Contractor shall provide in the contract price a sum sufficient to cover the cost of such installation which includes roughing in, unloading, uncrating, storing, protection, assembling, setting in place and making final connections to equipment furnished by the Owner.

1.3 WORK SITE INSPECTION

A. The Contractor is responsible for examination of the work site and a thorough acquaintance of the details/requirements of the Contract Documents including obstacles likely to be encountered in the performance and completion of the Work. No allowance will be made, subsequent to completion of the bidding process, for any error or negligence, inadvertent or otherwise, on the part of the Contractor, for failure to comply with documented contract requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 1000


ADD ALTERNATES 012300 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 01 2300 – ADD ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to

incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


ADD ALTERNATES 012300 - 24/20/2016

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Add Alternate No. 1 – Convertor Boxes, Smartboards, Short-throw Projectors and TVs

1. Base Bid: Includes the purchase and installation of all infrastructure required to hook up the Smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations.

2. Add Alternate #1: Includes the purchase and installation of all the convertor boxes, smartboards, short throw projectors and TVs. Reference architectural and electrical drawings for locations. See specification section 11 500 “Educational Equipment”.



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 2500 – SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.

B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under Section

"Submittals."

C. Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards to products specified.

D. Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options are

included under Section "Materials and Equipment." 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of

construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions:

1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award

of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders

issued by governing authorities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 60 days after award of contract. Requests received more than 60 days after award of contract may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. 1. E-mail each request for substitution to the Project Architect and The Owner for

consideration. Submit requests using CSI Substitution Request Form 13.1A 2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each

request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:



a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and

installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with

those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect.

d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.

g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

3. Architect's Action: Within ten working days of receipt of the request for substitution, the

Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Within three weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of the additional information or documentation, which ever is later, the Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.

1. Revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.

4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

5. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

6. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations.

7. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is



compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty.

9. The Contractor shall provide appropriate credit for substitute material, equipment, labor etc. if the substitution is acceptable to the Architect, Engineer and County.

B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples

that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 2900 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's

Construction Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Schedule.

B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are included in Section "Submittals".

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. The General Contractor shall coordinate preparation of its Schedule of Values for its part of the Work with preparation of the Contractors' Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative

schedules and forms, including:

a. Contractor's construction schedule. b. Application of Payment form. c. List of subcontractors. f. List of products. g. List of principals suppliers and fabricators. h. Schedule of submittals.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect and Owner at the earliest feasible date,

but in no case later than 10 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the format

for the Schedule of Values. Also include all items shown on the drawings but not included in a particular specification section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. c. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.



2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed; provide a line item and schedule value for each specification section at a minimum. Where the architect requests that a line item be broken down into further sub categories the contractor shall comply

a. Generic name. b. Related Specification Section. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value. g. Total Dollar value broken down into 2 columns 1. Materials costs 2. All other costs (labor, equipment rental, OH&P, etc.) h. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to

total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.

a. Each line item of the Schedule of values must be broken down into 2 columns as

described above.

4. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract sum.

5. For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

6. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to

the extent that such items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. a. At the Contractor's option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that

are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense.

7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or

Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT:

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Construction Manager and paid for by the Owner.

1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial



Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application or Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA G-702 - Latest Edition.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution

by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.

4. Each monthly pay application must be accompanied by the Contractor’s updated schedule as required by Section 01 3100 Construction Schedule.

5. Contractor shall also include a waiver of liens in each application.

E. Transmittal: Please submit five (5) completed copies of the AIA G-702, Schedule of Values and Certificate of Payment. These forms may be xeroxed but the signatures of the Contractor's representative must be original. Page 2 of the Schedule of Values should be complete and, if applicable, the original signatures of the architect/engineer should be obtained before the schedule is submitted to the Owner.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment (within 30 days of Notice to Proceed) include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (90-day) detailed-Schematic of Balance. 5. Schedule of principal products. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal Schedule. (preliminary, if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments and their resumes 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the

Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of pre-construction meeting. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 17. Initial settlement survey and damage report.

H. Second Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of the second Application for Payment (within 45 to 60 days of Notice to Proceed).



1. Detailed CPM Schedule for entire project.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portion of the Work.

J. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include:

1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. 2. Warranties, guarantees, and maintenance agreements. 3. Test/adjust/balance records. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Meter readings. 6. Start-up performance reports. 7. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance. 8. Final Cleaning. 9. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety. 10. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. 11. Final progress photographs. 12. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of

Substantial Completion. K. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide

with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following:

1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. 6. Certified property survey. 7. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. 8. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 10. Change of door locks to Owner's access.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01 2900


CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 31 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 3100 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

A. Pursuant to Article 4.11 of the General Conditions of this Contract, the following additional

scheduling requirements are a part of this Contract. B. Work under this section shall consist of furnishing and maintaining a Construction Schedule

utilizing a computer based network analysis scheduling program such as Primavera Project Planner (P6) or equal. The schedule shall be prepared in a precedence format and show in detail how the Contractor plans to execute and coordinate the Work. The Construction Schedule shall be based on and incorporate the Contract Milestone(s) and Completion Dates specified and shall show the order in which the Contractor shall perform the Work. In addition, the Construction Schedule shall indicate the planned dates of submittal preparation and review, start-up and testing for equipment, systems and subsystems; and all interface activities and matters involving mutual support between the Contractor, SubContractors, Suppliers, Code Enforcement Inspections, and the Owner. The Contractor shall use this schedule in the planning, scheduling, direction, coordination and execution of the Work.

C. Reporting Format: The Contractor’s scheduling software shall have the capability of furnishing

data reports or sorts in the following formats:

1. Activity listing by activity; 2. Activity listing by early and late start dates; 3. Activity listing by early and late finish dates; 4. Critical path activities; 5. Activity listing by responsibility code, Subcontractor, or division; 6. Activity listing by total float; 7. Computer produced time scaled network diagram; and 8. Computer produced bar chart.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. The Construction Schedule shall be cost loaded and used as the basis for determining the Schedule of Values, Payment Schedule, and Progress Payments. The Owner shall be under no contractual obligation and shall have no responsibility to process Contractor’s application for payment until the Contractor has submitted an acceptable Construction Schedule in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. The Contractor agrees to adjust network logic, activity sequences or inactivity durations subject to

the A/E review and approval, including, but not limited to, adjustments as required to maintain progress to ensure completion within the Contract Time, and to absorb within his schedule slippages, delays, changes in sequence required by project conditions, labor inefficiency and resource unavailability subject only to any time extension justified under the Contract Documents.

C. The Contractor shall provide written documentation signed by all major Subcontractors and



suppliers of the major equipment that demonstrates they concur with the elements of the Construction Schedule and will perform in accordance with it. The written documentation must be submitted with the schedule or immediately following execution of a contract with the Subcontractor and supplier of major equipment. Any modifications to the schedule which impacts major Subcontractors and equipment suppliers must also be accompanied by written documentation signed by the major Subcontractors and equipment suppliers which demonstrates that they concur with the updated schedule and will perform in accordance with it.

D. Float or slack is defined as the amount of time between the early start date and the late start date or

the early finish date and the late finish date of any of the activities in the Construction Schedule. Float or slack is not time for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Owner or the Contractor. Use of float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic, special lead/lag logic restraints, unspecified milestones, and extended activity times are prohibited and use of float time disclosed or implied by use of alternative float-suppression techniques shall be shared to the benefit of Owner and Contractor. Use of such float suppression techniques shall be cause for rejection of the schedule and any revisions or updates.

E. The schedule shall clearly identify the critical path activities leading to the Substantial Completion

and Final Completion dates as set forth in the Contract Documents. If the schedule indicates an earlier completion date than that set forth in the Contract Documents, the difference between the Schedules and the Contract Document dates shall be considered to be part of the total float available. This float is a resource available to both the Owner and the Contractor and may not be used as a basis of claim by the Contractor for additional compensation for actual project completion after the early completion schedule date but before the Substantial Completion or Final Completion dates.

F. The schedule as developed shall show the sequence and interdependence of activities required for

complete performance of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring all work sequences are logical and the schedule shows a coordinated plan of the work.

G. Failure by the Contractor to include any element of work required for performance of the Contract

or failure to properly sequence the work shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work within the Contract Time.

H. The work shall be executed at such a rate as will ensure meeting the specified Substantial

Completion date in the Contract. By execution of the Contract, the Contractor represents it has analyzed the work, the materials and methods involved, the systems of the building, availability of qualified labor, restrictions of the site, constraints imposed, workload and capacity to perform the work, and agrees that the specified times are reasonable considering the existing conditions prevailing in the locality of the work, including weather conditions, and other factors, with reasonable allowance for variations from average or ideal conditions.

I. The Substantial Completion date provided is considered essential to the satisfactory performance

of the Contract and to the coordination of all work on the project. The Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to execute the work in accordance with the specified Substantial Completion dates.

J. The Contractor is to provide the operations, manpower, resources, materials, and all items and

work necessary to complete the work and meet the Substantial Completion and Final Completion dates provided. The Contractor understands and agrees that: the Substantial Completion, Final Completion, actual start and completion dates, rate of progress, and coordination are essential conditions of this project. The Contractor must include in this schedule any contractual special conditions including, but not limited to, phased work, work restrictions/access/shift work, and



work being performed by separate Contractors. The Contractor is prohibited from assigning milestones that are not consistent with key dates shown in the Contract Documents.

K. It is understood and agreed that TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE and the Contractor agrees to

diligently follow and adhere to the schedule with due diligence so as to execute the work within the Substantial Completion and Final Completion dates stipulated in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall, at no additional cost, take all necessary steps, including overtime, double shifts, weekends, and holiday work to complete this work and meet the Substantial Completion and Final Completion dates stipulated in the Contract Documents.

3.2 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall submit a Preliminary Construction Schedule within 15 calendar days after the Notice of Award.

B. The Preliminary Construction Schedule is required before the start of construction activities and

shall consist of four (4) prints of a Network Diagram and two (2) sets of the program data files on an electronic exchange media such as a compact disk. The Contractor’s Submittal shall indicate which days of the week will be planned work days and the dates of all scheduled non-work days.

C. The Preliminary Construction Schedule shall depict major components of the Work and the

sequence relations between major components and subdivisions of major components with further detail/attention to construction and procurement activities to be performed or which are being performed during the first 90 days of the project.

D. The Preliminary schedule shall include those activities that are necessary to properly indicate:

1. The approach to the overall Work. The Work for each phase or area must be represented by a least one Summary Activity, such that the activities cumulatively indicate the entire Construction Schedule.

2. Summary Activities shall be replaced and expanded with detailed activities when the Preliminary Schedule is incorporated into the Construction Schedule.

E. The schedule shall be computerized and presented in the form of bar charts and shall consist of

horizontal lines, or bars plotted along a daily time scale. The horizontal bars shall indicate the start and finish dates for each work activity depicted.

F. The Preliminary Construction Schedule will be superseded upon approval of the Construction

Schedule described below. G. The Owner, A/E, and Contractor shall meet within ten (10) days of receipt of the Contractor’s

proposed Preliminary Schedule for a joint review and any correction or adjustment of the proposed Interim Schedules. Acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor’s Preliminary Schedule creates neither a warranty, expressed or implied, nor acknowledgement of admission of the reasonableness of the activities, logic, durations, manpower or cost loading the Interim Schedule.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall submit a detailed Construction Schedule within 30 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. If the Construction Schedule is not submitted in a complete and acceptable manner by the next payment application the Owner shall be under no contractual obligation and shall have no responsibility to process Contractor’s application for payment until the Contractor has submitted an acceptable schedule in accordance with the requirements of the Contract



Documents. B. The Construction Schedule shall consist of two parts: a computer-drawn time-scaled network

diagram and a computer-generated network analysis or printout. The submission shall include four (4) prints of the Network Diagram, four (4) sets of computer produced Schedules and Reports, and two (2) sets of the program data files on an electronic exchange media such as a compact disc. The Construction Schedule shall cover the entire Contract Time and include all revisions reviewed and accepted by the Owner. Each major component and subdivision component shall be accurately plotted on time scale sheets on reproducible paper not to exceed 30 inches by 42 inches in size.

C. The initial Construction Schedule submittal shall reflect the Contractor’s plan for the performance

of all of the Work as of the date of the Notice to Proceed and shall not reflect the actual progress of any of the Work. The Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall consist of but not be limited to the following:

1. Procurement Activities, including preparation and review of submittals, ordering,

manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery of long-lead equipment or materials, and any required off-site testing by the Owner or A/E. Long-lead items include equipment or materials requiring more than one month between ordering and delivery to the job site.

2. Construction Activities, including A/E review of samples, mock-ups, curing, code enforcement inspections, and required testing and/or commissioning.

3. The Construction Schedule shall indicate the sequence of the Work and the time of starting and completing each activity.

D. All restraints and contract milestones shall be clearly indicated in the Construction Schedule. The

Construction Schedule shall be used as the basis for reporting progress, schedule controlling and schedule forecasting, as required herein, and shall be sufficiently detailed so as to allow the Owner to evaluate the Contractor’s planned schedule and to monitor Contractor’s Progress on a day-to-day basis during performance.

E. The Construction Schedule as approved shall be the Baseline Schedule against which all progress

shall be measured. It shall be used by the Contractor and the A/E as the basis for evaluating changes and claims and, in conjunction with the schedule of values, for evaluation of the Application for Payment. The Schedule of Values (Article 9.2 of the General Conditions) and the Payment Schedule (Article 9.6.3 of the General Conditions) shall be developed using the values indicated in the Construction Schedule as a guideline.

F. Should A/E or Owner reject Contractor’s Construction Schedule, or any subsequent update or

revision, as not being in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of the A/E’s rejection, make the changes or revisions required to conform to the Contract Documents, or as directed by Owner should A/E and Contractor not agree to the revisions required.

G. Activity Depiction

1. Activity numbers shall be unique and shall not change as revisions are made to the schedule.

2. Activity shall have a concise description of the Work represented by the activity. The Work related to each activity shall be limited to one work trade and one construction area.

3. Activities shall be cost loaded to show its dollar value as a part of the whole. 4. The durations of activities shall be expressed in whole working days, with no single

activity in excess of fourteen (14) calendar days or a value exceeding $25,000 without



prior acceptance of the A/E or Owner. Non construction activities such as concrete curing, mobilization, shop drawings and sample submittals, fabrication of materials, and delivery of materials and equipment, may have values in excess of fourteen (14) calendar days and values over $25,000 unless otherwise directed by the A/E.

5. Activities shall be assigned separate activity codes to create a Work breakdown structure and, as a minimum, shall include:

a. An activity code (maximum five characters) to define specific performance

responsibility by discipline or Subcontractor as acceptable to the A/E. All abbreviations shall be fully described in a legend attached to the Construction Schedule.

b. An activity code (maximum five characters) to define concise Work area (e.g. floor or elevation, location of yard piping, location of site electrical, paving locations). All abbreviations shall be fully described in legend attached to the Construction Schedule. As requested by the Owner or A/E, either prior or subsequent to the acceptance of the Construction Schedule, the Contractor shall provide, without additional cost to the Owner, on prints of the Contract Drawings graphic illustrations of the relationships of construction activities to intended Work areas as identified by the Contractor.

c. An activity code (maximum five characters) to identify the project phase of each activity as it relates to the phases identified in these documents.

d. An activity code (maximum five characters) to identify the Structure or building as defined on the contract drawings.

e. An activity code (maximum five characters) to identify the Specification for the activity.

H. The Construction Schedule shall indicate that the project will begin on the date given in the Notice

to Proceed and will be completed within the number of calendar days specified in the Contract Documents.

I. The Contractor shall ensure that the schedule represents an accurate, efficient, reasonable and

feasible plan and method for accomplishing the Work throughout the time of performance. While the owner and A/E will review the Construction Schedule, the schedule itself is the Contractor’s who has full responsibility for its preparation, content, revisions and updating in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

J. It is to be expressly understood and agreed by the Contractor that the Owner does not guarantee

that Contractor can start work activities on the “early start” or “late start” date or complete work activities on the “early finish” or “late finish” date shown in the baseline schedule, or any subsequent updates or revisions. If Contractor’s schedule indicates that Owner or a separate Contractor is to perform an activity by a specific date, or within a certain duration, Owner or any separate Contractor under contract with Owner shall not be bound to said date or duration unless Owner expressly and specifically agrees in writing to same; the Owner’s or A/E’s overall review and approval or acceptance of the schedule does not constitute any agreement to specific dates or durations for activities or the Owner of any separate Contractor.

K. The construction schedule shall indicate the following:

1. Procurement activities such as submittals and fabrication for critical materials and equipment.

2. Off-site activities. 3. Inspections, start up, testing and balancing, mobilization, and demobilization. 4. Interfaces with the work of outside Contractors such as utility companies.



5. Description of activity and activity number. 6. Planned and remaining duration time for each activity. 7. Early start date for each activity. 8. Late start date for each activity. 9. Early finish date for each activity. 10. Late finish date for each activity. 11. Float available for each path of activities containing float. 12. Actual start date for each activity begun. 13. Actual finish date for each activity completed. 14. Identification of all critical path activities in the network analysis. 15. The critical path for the project, with said path of activities being clearly and easily

recognizable on the time-scaled network diagram. The relationship between all non-critical activities and activities on the critical path shall be clearly shown on the network diagram.

16. The percent complete of each activity in progress or completed. L. The Contractor shall submit a narrative report with the Construction Schedule indicating

anticipated allocation of the following resources and work shifts to be utilized on the project:

1. Labor resources; 2. Equipment resources; 3. Whether work will be performed on a shift basis and whether it is to be done on a 5-, 6-

or 7-day work week. M. Monthly anticipated adverse weather days as established in General Conditions, Article 8.6, TIME

EXTENSIONS FOR WEATHER, shall be considered and included in the planning and scheduling of all weather affected Work activities in order to complete all Work within the Contract Time.

N. Custom calendars should be developed by the Contractor to identify the differing holiday, weather,

workweek, and other work calendars on which specific work activities will be performed. Each activity should be assigned to the calendar corresponding with its work activity, weather, or season.

O. The Owner, A/E, and the Contractor shall meet, with in 20 days of receipt by the Owner of the

Contractor’s proposed Construction Schedule, to perform a joint review of, and make corrections or adjustments to the proposed Construction Schedule. If the A/E or Owner questions the Contractor’s proposed activities, logic, or durations, the Contractor shall, within seven (7) days of receipt of any A/E or Owner request, provide a satisfactory revision to or adequate justification for such to the A/E and Owner. The A/E or Owner may at any time as part of its review, acceptance and subsequent monthly updating process, request that additional details be included in the Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall, at no additional cost, provide the details requested to the satisfaction of A/E and Owner. In the event the Contractor fails to define any element of work, activity or logic, such omission or error, when discovered, shall be corrected by the Contractor in the next monthly Construction Schedule Update without affect on the Contract Time. Within fourteen (14) days after the joint review between the Contractor, A/E, and Owner, the Contractor shall revise the Construction Schedule in accordance with agreements reached or direction given during the joint review and submit diagrams, printouts and electronic copies as already specified. Acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule does not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibility whatsoever for the accuracy or feasibility of the Construction Schedule, or of the Contractor’s ability to meet Substantial Completion and Final Completion requirements of the Contract, and such acceptance also creates neither a warranty, expressed or implied, nor an acknowledgement or admission of the practicability of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule.



3.4 NETWORK DIAGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. The Network Diagram shall be computer generated, in a time scaled format, on sheets no larger than 30” X 42” and no smaller than 11” x 17”, printed in color, and with font sizes no smaller than 8 point.

B. The Network Diagram shall be organized by grouping activities related to specific phases or areas

of the Project together for ease of understanding and simplification. C. The following shall be depicted on the Network Diagram for each activity:

1. Activity number 2. Description of Work 3. Activity duration 4. Designation of critical path where applicable.

3.5 COMPUTER PRODUCED SCHEDULE REPORT REQUIREMENTS

A. Schedule reports shall include, for each activity depicted in the Construction Schedule, the following information:

1. Activity Number 2. Description of the Work 3. Original Duration 4. Remaining Duration 5. Percent complete (time) 6. Work phase / area / floor codes as applicable 7. Responsibility code 8. Early Start and Finish dates 9. Actual Start and Finish dates 10. Total Float

B. The Contractor shall submit a Schedule Calculation Summary Report which includes listings of

constraints, open-ends, out-of-sequence work, and scheduling statistics. This report is computer-generated when the Project Schedule is calculated after updating activity progress at the month end processing.

3.6 UPDATES

A. The Construction Schedule shall be updated every month to reflect the actual as-built data and the update shall be utilized as an essential part of the payment application review. Three (3) copies of the monthly Construction Schedule update are to be submitted with the submission of each monthly Application for Payment with proposed updates and revisions marked thereon. If the Construction Schedule updates and revisions are not submitted in a complete and acceptable manner by the next subsequent payment application, then the Owner shall be under no contractual obligation and shall have no responsibility to process Contractor’s application for payment until the Contractor has submitted an acceptable schedule update in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The updated construction schedule shall indicate the following:

1. Those activities in progress or to be performed in the future, and the percentage complete

of each activity; 2. The critical path for the project based upon the latest update data;



3. Tabular reports sorted as follows: 1) by Activity ID, and 2) by Total Float by Early Start. 4. All activities affected by approved time extensions, including but not limited to revised

Contract Completion dates and milestones. B. Progress Reports: The Contractor shall forward to the Owner and A/E with each application for

payment a narrative monthly summary report, in a form acceptable to the Owner and A/E of the progress of the Work including but not limited to the following information:

1. The progress of the Contract Work, whether in the mills, shops, or in the field, stating the

existing status, rate of progress, estimated time of completion and cause of delays, if any. 2. Description of work accomplished since submission of previous progress schedule and

work planned during the next period. 3. Comparison of the actual status of the Work with Contractor’s Construction Schedule as

previously submitted to the A/E or as previously updated or revised in accordance with the review of the Owner.

4. Status of equipment and materials deliveries and shop drawing preparation and review. 5. Changes or additions to Contractor’s supervisory personnel since the preceding progress

report. 6. Causes of any delays. 7. Changes in logic, sequence, or durations or activities and the reasons therefore. 8. Actions proposed by Contractor to restore schedule (including what is being done, or is

planned to be done, in problem areas). 9. What problems or changes are anticipated or expected by Contractor and what is

Contractor’s plan to deal with same so as to minimize or prevent any delay to completion. 10. Changes in the Payment Schedule.

C. Neither the updating or revision of Contractor’s Construction Schedule nor the submission,

updating, change or revision of any report or schedule submitted to A/E by Contractor under the Contract nor Owner’s review or non-objection of any such report or schedule shall have the effect of amending or modifying, in any way, the Contract Time, any Contract Completion Date, or Contract Milestone Dates or of modifying or limiting in any way Contractor’s obligations under this Contract.

3.7 REVISIONS

A. If, as a result of the monthly construction schedule update, it is the opinion of the A/E and Owner that the Construction Schedule no longer represents the actual planned prosecution and the actual progress of the Work, the A/E or Owner may request that the Contractor revise the Construction Schedule to reflect its current planning. The Contractor shall submit to the A/E and Owner in writing, a schedule analysis illustrating the influence, if any, of the proposed schedule revision on Contract Time. Each such schedule analysis shall be submitted to the satisfaction of the A/E and Owner prior to the next Construction Schedule Update. Compliance with such submittal requirements shall be a condition precedent to any obligation of the Owner to consider any Application for Payment.

B. If the schedule update indicates that the Substantial Completion date will be 14 or more calendar

days later than that required by the Contract the Contractor shall be required to prepare a Schedule Recovery Plan for regaining the time that the Project is behind schedule. The Schedule Recovery Plan shall be submitted within five (5) working days and should indicate in both narrative form and in a detailed time-scaled bar chart schedule with logic the following information:

1. Amount of time the activity is late. 2. Reason for lateness



3. Proposed method for recovering the time and achieving any/all required project Substantial Completion deadline(s).

C. The Contractor may also request reasonable revisions to the Construction Schedule in the event

that its planning for the Work is revised. If the Contractor desires to make changes in the Schedule to reflect revisions in its planned methods of operating and scheduling of the Work, the Contractor shall notify the A/E and Owner in writing, stating the reason for the proposed revisions and submit to the A/E and Owner a schedule analysis illustrating the influence, if any, of the proposed schedule revision on Contract Time. Each such schedule analysis shall demonstrate how the Contractor would incorporate the proposed schedule revision into the Construction Schedule. The schedule analysis shall demonstrate the time impact of the proposed schedule revision to be initiated, reflecting the projected status of the Work at that point in time, and provide the event time computations of all affected activities if the proposed revisions were to be accepted by the A/E and Owner. Accepted revisions will be incorporated into the Construction Schedule at the next monthly Construction Schedule Update Meeting.

3.8 REQUESTED TIME ADJUSTMENT SCHEDULE

A. If Contractor believes he is entitled to an extension of the Contract Time under the Contract documents, Contractor shall submit to A/E and Owner as a Proposed Change Order (PCO), a separate schedule analysis (entitled “Requested Time Adjustment Schedule”) indicating suggested adjustments in the Contract Time which should, in the opinion of the Contractor, be made in accordance with the Contract Documents due to changes, delays, or conditions which are expected or contemplated by Contractor (whether such conditions are excusable under the Contract or are due to Contractor fault). This separate schedule shall be time-scaled utilizing a computer generated and computer-drawn network analysis schedule and shall be accompanied by a formal time extension request as required by the Contract Documents and a detailed narrative justifying the time extension requested.

B. Time extensions for weather delays during a given month will be allowed only for actual work

days in excess of those numbers provided by General Conditions Article 8.6, TIME EXTENSIONS FOR WEATHER, and only when those excess days of delay affect the current critical path(s) leading to the specified Substantial Completion or Contract Completion dates.

Anticipated lost time due to weather shall be included in the schedule to insure completion of all

contract work within the contract time. These days will be eliminated from the schedule’s work calendar and spread over each month. Individual activity durations are not to be increased to include expected lost weather days. The schedule shall reflect the following anticipated adverse weather days in all weather dependent activities.

Monthly anticipated adverse weather days: J F M A M J J A S O N D 8 7 7 8 7 7 5 6 4 6 5 5 Time extensions for abnormal weather will only be granted when the actual lost days exceed the

maximum number and are not compensable. The contractor’s incorporation of the anticipated lost weather days must be acceptable to the engineer. Time extensions for unusually severe weather beyond the contractual completion date will not be granted if the contract duration has extended beyond the contractual completion date due to contractor’s delay. Restrictions on all weather sensitive construction activities shall be included in the schedule. The contractor’s incorporation of these restrictions into the schedule must be acceptable to the owner.



C. The time adjustment request shall include schedule forecasts that predict the proposed Project Completion Date and a forecast of the achievement of milestones listed in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.

D. The “Requested Time Adjustment Schedule” shall clearly and accurately reflect Contractor’s

actual intention and proposed time adjustments as of the latest update. It shall also reflect any adjustments made by Contractor in the logic, sequence or duration of any activities in the Construction Schedule, and any time extensions previously granted by Owner, along with actual and expected progress.

E. Owner shall not have any obligation to consider any time extension request unless the

requirements of the Contract Documents, and specifically, but not limited to these requirements, are complied with; and Owner shall not be responsible or liable to Contractor for any constructive acceleration due to failure of Owner to grant time extensions under the Contract Documents should Contractor fail to substantially comply with the submission requirements and the justification requirements of this Contract for time extension requests. Contractor’s failure to perform in accordance with the Construction Schedule shall not be excused, nor be chargeable to Owner, because Contractor has submitted time extension requests.

F. Extensions of time for performance as described in the Contract Documents will be granted only to

the extent that time adjustments for the activity or activities affected exceed the total float along the path of activities affected at the time of Notice to Proceed of a change order or the commencement of any delay or condition for which an adjustment is warranted under the Contract Documents.

G. Change Orders: If an extension or contraction of any milestone or completion date is authorized

by a change order issued by the A/E and Owner the Contractor shall revise his Construction Schedule, milestone, and completion dates accordingly. Any and all activities impacted by a change to the milestone or completion date shall likewise be adjusted to reflect the revised requirements.

H. All of the Contractor’s detailed calculations, documents and Subcontractor data supporting or

providing the basis for any schedules, reports and forecasts shall be made available within seven (7) days of A/E’s request therefore.

3.9 TWO-WEEK LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall prepare and distribute a two-week “look ahead” bar chart schedule at each progress meeting. The look ahead shall be in a format acceptable to the A/E and represent the Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ work plans for construction activities to occur during the following two (2) week period. The bar chart shall reference the specific activities as defined in the Construction Schedule and shall indicate locations of Work, quantities of materials to be installed and planned durations of activities.



PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 10-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 3110 - PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Furnish all labor, materials, and services for all required meetings in accordance with contract provisions. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Coordination B. Scheduling C. Construction Quality Control Meetings D. Safety Meetings E. Project Closeout

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Pre-Construction Meeting is to be scheduled by the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the Notice of Award and prior to the start of construction. The conference will be held at a location/time to be determined by the Owner. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the Architect and shall become a part of the Contract file.

B. Attendance:

1. Owner 2. Architect (and consultants) 3. General Contractor 4. Major Subcontractors 5. Utility Company and Maryland Department of Transportation representatives (as

applicable) 6. Prince George’s County Code enforcement inspector(s) 7. General Contractor’s representatives for Safetyand Quality

C. Agenda:

1. Allow each attendee to present their role in the project and any special requirements they may have.

2. Discuss Traffic Control and procedures for open cut and road closures, if applicable, with Maryland Department of Transportation representative.

3. Discuss Contractor’s safety plan, quality control, housekeeping, temporary facilities, jobsite security, and emergency procedures.

4. Discuss the status and schedule of all utility relocations or new services and ensure that the utility companies have been authorized to provide the relocation or new services.

5. Establish contract protocols regarding communications, submittals, RFIs, Payment Application, Schedule, testing, inspections, etc.

6. Transmit contract required construction sets of drawings, specifications and permits to the Contractor.

7. Review the status of Labor and Material Bonds, Performance Bond, Insurance Certificates, List of proposed subcontractors, and other relevant information needed from the Contractor.



8. Disseminate the Notice to Proceed (NTP) date. 9. Obtain Emergency Contact information for the Contractor and other parties as required.

3.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Project progress meetings will be held once every two weeks or at a frequency directed by the Owner. Meeting location prior to mobilization to the site will be at Owner discretion but meetings will be held at the project site once the site office trailers are established. The Architect will prepare the agenda, chair the meeting, and prepare meeting minutes. The meeting minutes shall be completed and distributed prior to the next meeting.

B. Meeting Attendance:

1. Project Manager (County Design Agency) 2. A/E Project Manager and consultants as required for a particular meeting 3. Contractor Project Manager 4. Contractor Superintendent 5. User Agency Representatives/Coordinator

C. Meeting Agenda:

1. Review and approve minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review Construction Schedules, review work progress since last meeting, review planned

progress during next work period. 3. Review Old Business from previous meetings. 4. Document any field observations, questions and decisions. 5. Review regulatory inspection status. 6. Review Deficiency Log. 7. Review Submittal Log and identify key submittals that require action. 8. Review status of RFIs / ASIs and identify those key RFIs / ASIs that require action. 9. Review status of Change Orders, PCO’s, and Pending PCO’s or Construction Change

Directives, RFPs, and FOs. 10. Review Pay Application Status. 11. Review Contractor Safety Plan and discuss any observed concerns. 12. Review Q/C or Quality Management Plan and discuss any concerns. 13. Discuss New Business.

3.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. Conduct conferences at the Project site before the start of each construction activity as specified in the Specifications or otherwise directed by the Owner.

B. Attendees: Subcontractors, installers and representatives of manufacturers involved with or

affected by the installations shall attend the meeting. The Contractor shall advise the Owner/Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

C. Agenda: Review progress of construction activities and preparations for the particular activity,

including requirements for the following:

1. The applicable contract document requirements. 2. Related RFIs / Change Orders 3. Purchases / Deliveries 4. Submittals / Review of mockups



5. Possible conflicts (space, access, compatibility issues) 6. Time schedules 7. Temporary facilities and controls 8. Inspections/Quality control 9. Safety (Protection of construction, equipment, and personnel) 10. Installation procedure(s) 11. Coordination with other work

D. The Contractor is to keep a written record of each meeting and produce/distribute minutes

recording discussions and agreements for items above to all attendees. E. Do not proceed with installation if the conference has not been successfully concluded.


PROJECT REPORTING AND PHOTOGRAPHS 01 32 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 3200 – PROJECT REPORTING AND PHOTOGRAPHS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The Contractor, as a minimum, shall submit daily field reports, monthly progress reports, and project

photographs to the Owner and AE for review, status and record purposes as indicated below. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the production of pre-construction photographs prior to start on any work on-site. Pre-construction photographs shall document the condition of all existing surface features and structures within the project limits. The Contractor shall provide pre-construction photographs, to the Owner and Architect via CD, FTP site or e-mail, prior to commencement of work.

3.2 DAILY FIELD REPORTS

A. The Contractor shall record, in a format acceptable to the Owner, a Daily Field Report for all Contractor and Subcontractor activities for each day of the Contract from NTP to Substantial Completion. Each report shall be kept in a binder in the project trailer for review by owner / architect. Each report shall contain the following data:

1. Project Name, Project Number, and Contract Number. 2. The number of workers (by trade and company) and the hours worked by each worker. 3. Work being performed, referenced to work location and associated CPM activity

number(s). 4. Weather 5. Situations or circumstances which could delay work or give cause for claims for

extension of time or added cost. 6. Name and affiliation of all visitors to the site. Record their observations and/or reason for

the site visit. 7. Equipment utilized or on site and idle. Provide the serial numbers or other identifying

features and hours worked for each piece of equipment utilized on that day. 8. Report on any recordable or reportable safety issues. 9. Report on any quality issues discovered or corrected.

B. Non-Compliance - Failure to complete and submit the required reports may have an impact on

approval of the Contractor’s monthly payment application. 3.3 WEEKLY PROGRESS REPORTS

A. The Contractor shall summarize the daily field reports, specified in Section 3.2, into one document and submit them via email to the Architect and Owner every Friday.

3.4 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTS

A. The requirement for a formal monthly progress report will be satisfied by submission of required monthly progress photographs, the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan with monthly updates (per specification 014000), schedule updates (per specification 013100) and a completed Contractor’s


PROJECT REPORTING AND PHOTOGRAPHS 01 32 00-2 4/20/2016

Application for Payment. Should circumstances arise where the Owner feels that such documentation is not sufficiently addressing all issues taking place in the prosecution of the work, the Owner, at his discretion may direct the Contractor to provide additional information, photographs and/or narrative.

3.5 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Progress photographs shall be furnished by the Contractor in digital format, acceptable to the Owner, with sufficient pixilation to allow enlargement without noticeable loss of resolution.

B. Depending on the size of the project and at the discretion of the Owner/Architect, a minimum of

twelve (12) to a maximum of twenty-five (25) progress photographs shall be taken each month and shall be submitted with each Application for Payment (i.e. on or about the first day of each month) until project Substantial Completion.

C. Photographs shall be taken from the same interior and exterior vantage points as directed by the

Owner/Architect. Photos shall not be edited, modified, or enhanced in any way without the Owner’s advanced approval in writing.

D. The Contractor shall transmit these photographs via CD, FTP site or email with each month’s

Application for Payment. END OF SECTION 01 3200


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 3300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division-1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including;

1. Contractor's construction schedule 2. Submittal schedule 3. Project Submittals (Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, etc.) 4. Daily Construction Reports 5. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 01 Sections and other Contract

Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to:

a. Permits. b. Performance and Payment Bonds c. Insurance Certificates d. List of Subcontractors

B. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Division 01 Section - "Payment Procedures".

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with the order of construction activities. Upload and transmit each submittal via e-mail sufficiently in advance of the performance of related construction activities to avoid construction delays. Timely submission of submittals shall be a condition for approval of all progress payments to the Contractor. All submittals required by Divisions 1-33 shall comply with the requirements of Division 01 including, but not limited to:

1. Schedule of Values 2. Project schedule and updates 3. Major subcontractors and suppliers’ milestones 4. Submittal schedule

B. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and

related activities that require sequential activity. C. Coordinate submission of separate submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will

not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

D. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.



E. Processing:

1. Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for re-submittals

2. Allow fifteen (15) working days, exclusive of transit time, for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

3. If subsequent submittals are necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. 4. Allow fifteen (15) working days for reprocessing each submittal 5. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

F. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.

1. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop

Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. See General Conditions for information on label.

G. Submittal Transmittal:

1. E-Mail all submittals to the architect for distribution to the design team for review. All

submittals shall be in PDF form. If submittals are too large to send via regular e-mail they should be sent using the contractor’s FTP site. Samples shall be sent by mail – a minimum of two samples shall be submitted or the submittal will be rejected.

2. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each

submittal from Contractor to Architect vie e-mail using a transmittal form. Each submittal must have a separate transmittal form. Multiple submittals received on one transmittal form will be returned unreviewed All submittals not in accordance with the requirements of this section will be immediately returned "Not Reviewed". Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action.

3. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or

separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements.

4. Substitutions must be clearly identified on submittal.

H. Submittal Timeline Requirements: The contractor shall transmit all submittals to the architect

within one hundred twenty (120) calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Owner shall have the right to withhold progress payments until all submittals are made.

I. Electronic (CAD) Files

1. The Architect will make electronic (CAD) files of the drawings available to the contractor under the following conditions:

a. The contractor shall sign and abide by the architect’s Graphic Files Agreement.

A copy of the agreement will be provided to the contractor upon request.



b. The contractor shall pay the architect for the files as follows:

1. The cost of preparing the CADD files for use by the Contractor requires that the Architect charge a nominal fee for their use. The following schedule is to be used to provide the Contractor with copies in one of two electronic formats:

1 to 10 drawings $200.00 set-up charge + $25 per drawing 10 to 100 drawings $500.00 set-up charge + $10 per drawing 101 to 500 drawings $1,000.00 set-up charge + $5 per drawing

2. The cost of converting the CADD files from .dwg (native AutoCAD) to .dxf for use with other drafting programs is as follows:

1 to 500 drawings $200.00 set-up charge + $5 per drawing

3. The cost of providing electronic file media, based on estimated cost of the media, is as follows:

CD $200.00 set-up charge + $50 / CD

1.4 SUBMITTAL NAMING/NUMBERING CONVENTION

A. The following submittal naming and numbering convention shall be followed for all Contractor submittals. Using Section 033000, “Cast In Place Concrete” as the example, the submittal number, 033000-01-01 would be defined as follows:

6 digit spec. section # 2-digit Sequential # 2-digit iteration

03 3000 -01 -01

B. The first six digit field refers to the specification section for the product, in this case, ‘Concrete’. The second 2-digit field is to indicate the sequential submittal #. In this particular example, the submittal is for the first submittal of division 03300 to be transmitted. The final 2-digit iteration field is to identify successive reviews of the same submittal, i.e. 01 = first submittal, 02 = second, etc. Contractor submittals are to follow this naming convention for submittals called for by the individual Specification sections. The specification submittal types are defined in the following paragraphs.

1.5 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. See Division 01 Section - “Construction Schedule” for submittal requirements. 1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. A preliminary submittal schedule is to be submitted 15 days after the Notice of Award.

B. After the acceptance of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a final submittal schedule to be submitted with the CPM 30 days after Notice to Proceed. The final schedule will be subject to review by the Architect.

C. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,

Owner and subcontractors. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS



A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise

indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered to be a Shop Drawing.

B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns,

templates and similar drawings. Include the following information:

1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of dimensions established by field

measurement.

C. Submittal:

2. Submit one PDF file for the architect’s review. If the PDF is illegible, the entire

submittal will be returned unchecked. The re-submittal will have the same review time as the contractor's original submittal. Once the architect has reviewed the submittal and all corrective actions have been made by the contractor the contractor shall submit 2 printed copies of the submittal to Prince George’s County for their records.

3. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in

connection with construction.

1.8 PRODUCT DATA

A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings."

B. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes

information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information.

1. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 3. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

C. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.

D. Environmental Requirement Verification: Submit verification (i.e. manufacturer's letter of certification, highlighted product information, independent test reports, etc…) as required by each specification section.

E. Material Safety and Data Sheets 1. Provide MSDS (Material Safety and Data Sheets) for all products submitted and used on



the project. 2. Provide and highlight VOC information on all MSDS sheets and identify compliance with

requirements. 1.9 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit as required by 1.7.C above.

B. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, and suppliers required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

C. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the

installer's possession.

D. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 1.10 ARCHITECT’S ACTION

A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.

B. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

C. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action

stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken:

1. Where submittals are marked "Reviewed," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

2. When submittals are marked "Furnish as Corrected, " that part of the Work covered by

the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

3. When submittal is marked "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the

Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark.

4. Do not permit submittals marked "Rejected, Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the

Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMISSIONING

A. Data for Commissioning.

1. The Contractor will receive a written request from the Commissioning Authority requesting specific information needed about each piece of commissioned equipment or system.



2. Typically, this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating, troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, full details of any owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

3. The Commissioning Authority may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning process.

4. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.

5. Much of this information is contained in the regular O&M manual submittals normally submitted in the project. Typically, this information is required prior to the regular formal O&M manual submittals.

B. Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittals from the requirements of the contract Documents is not relieved by the Commissioning Authority’s review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01 3300


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.

B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect.

C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in

the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures.

2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

D. Contractor to refer to qualification requirements in each specification section. 5 years of previous

experience, or experience deemed reasonable by the owner is required for subcontractors, manufacturers, and installers.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:

1. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to

facilitate inspections and tests. 2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or

assisting the agency in taking samples. 3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to

testing laboratories (example, concrete). 4. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes

that require control by the testing agency.


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-2 4/20/2016

5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: The contractor shall cooperate fully with the owner’s independent testing agency as outlined in this section.

1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testing

laboratory or other qualified firm to perform services.

C. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.

1. The agency shall notify the Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or

deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the

Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.

D. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar

services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.

1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples

and similar activities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The Owner's testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect and Owner vie e-mail. All reports shall be submitted in timely fashion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired

construction.

C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.



TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation.

B. Site Utilization Plan - Prior to the start of work and no later than 30 days after Notice to Award the

Contractor shall submit a Site Utilization Plan for Owner review/approval. The plan shall show the locations and dimensions of any area(s) to be fenced and used by the Contractor, the number of trailers and/or sheds to be used, any equipment and material storage areas, access and haul routes, any areas to be graveled, construction entrance(s), trash dumpsters, temporary sanitary facilities, worker parking, project sign, and project bulletin board.

C. Community Impact - The Contractor shall schedule operations with a minimum of disruption of

affected, or neighboring, properties during construction. Consideration shall be given to property access, driveway maintenance, parking, pedestrian traffic, and overall public safety to the maximum extent possible. The Contractor shall abide by all governing ordinances in effect at the job site at the time of construction.

1.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES

A. All utility service accounts whether for temporary or permanent service shall be in the name of the Contractor until the date of Substantial Completion.

B. Electricity - The Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary electrical facilities as required

and shall arrange and pay for all electrical usage until date of Substantial Completion. All temporary facilities shall remain the property of the Contractor, and be removed after permanent connections have been completed. Electrical wiring, conduit or equipment which are part of the permanent electrical systems shall not be used for temporary electrical facilities unless specifically approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment and materials, or injury to personnel caused by temporary electrical installations. Costs for materials and installation of temporary electrical facilities shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

C. Water - The Contractor shall make all arrangements to install and pay for all temporary equipment,

piping, water meters and outlets for an adequate supply of clean water for construction purposes until date of Substantial Completion. Point of tie-in, meter(s) and hose bibs shall be indicated on the site utilization plan. Contractor shall furnish drinking water for all Contractor and Owner personnel.

D. Telephone and data / internet - The Contractor shall make arrangements for and pay all costs

associated with telephone and data / internet service for the temporary site office(s). E. Toilets - The Contractor shall provide temporary toilet facilities for the use of Contractor and

Owner personnel. Facilities shall comply with local and State sanitary laws and OSHA regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining such facilities in a clean, sanitary condition (including provision of adequate supplies of toilet paper and hand sanitizer) throughout the duration of the construction contract.

F. Heat



1. The Contractor, at his expense, shall furnish, install, and maintain temporary heat and

enclosures during contract activities and shall, as applicable, provide heat for specific operations as follows:

a. At all times during placing, setting, and curing of concrete and masonry, provide

sufficient heat to insure heating of all surrounding spaces involved to not less than 50 degrees F or as specified in the technical specifications.

b. From beginning of application of plaster and during the setting and curing period, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature in spaces involved of not less than 50 degrees F or as specified in the technical specifications.

c. For a period of ten (10) days prior to placing interior finishes, and until final acceptance of work or until full occupancy by Owner, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature in spaces involved of not less than 50 degrees F or as specified in the technical specifications.

d. For a period of forty-eight (48) hours previous to installation of floor finishes, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F; maintain this temperature during installation and maintain 55 degrees F temperature for at least 48 hours after installation or as specified in the technical specifications.

e. Maintain such heat as practicable to provide satisfactory working conditions for all trades.

2. The Contractor, at his cost, shall provide heat, enclosures, fuel, and services to protect all

work and materials against damage from dampness and cold until final acceptance of all work and materials in the Contract, unless the building is occupied by Owner prior to such acceptance.

3. If the Contractor desires operation of the permanent heating system to properly proceed

with work, he shall request permission of Architect/Owner in writing. If permission is granted, the Contractor shall accept full responsibility for damage or undue wear to the system and that the one-year warranty will not begin until final acceptance of the project by the Owner.

4. The use of open salamanders and other temporary heating devices which cause smoke

and damage will not be permitted. Fuel, equipment, and method of heating shall be satisfactory to the Architect and meeting all regulatory requirements.

G. The contractor shall provide the construction trailer(s) with internet access. Internet access shall be

high speed broadband by Cox or Verizon. Dial up access is not acceptable. 1.3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. General

1. Contractor shall provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction, as required to provide controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. Remove physical evidence of temporary facilities at completion of the Work.

2. Contractor shall obtain all applicable City, County and State permits required for the

construction of all Work, including but not limited to, Hazardous Material Management, and Earth Moving/ Dust Control.



B. Noise Control - Contractor’s vehicles and equipment shall be such as to minimize noise to the

greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to the latest OSHA standards and in no case will noise levels be permitted which interfere with the Work of the Owner or others. The Contractor shall also comply with the Prince George’s County Noise Ordinance.

C. Dust Control

1. Dust shall be kept down at all times, including non-working hours, weekends, and holidays. Soil at the site, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by the Contractor's operations and materials stockpiled for the project shall be treated with dust suppressors or covered to control dust. No dry power brooming will be permitted. Vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming shall be used instead. Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning off non-particle debris, such as that from reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting of concrete block, concrete, and asphalt will be permitted.

2. The Contractor shall comply with applicable provisions of the National Emission Standards for Asbestos (40 CFR 61 Subpart B).

3. The Contractor shall inspect vehicles for dirt prior to their leaving the construction site.

Dirt, soil, and rubble likely to be dislodge during transit shall be removed from the trucks and other vehicles prior to leaving site.

4. The Contractor shall ensure that material that may become airborne is covered during

transport to and from the site. Dump trucks hauling material from the construction site shall be covered with an appropriate covering device.

D. Water Control

1. Provide methods to control surface water and water from excavations and structures to

prevent damage to the Work, the Site, or adjoining properties. Control fill, grading and ditching to direct water away from excavations, pits, tunnels and other construction areas and to direct drainage to proper runoff courses so as to prevent any erosion, damage or nuisance.

2. Provide, operate and maintain equipment and facilities of adequate size to control surface

water. 3. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to

any portion of the Site or to adjoining areas and in conformance with all environmental requirements.

E. Pollution Control

1. Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or

atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. 2. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any

spillages, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth offsite, and replace with suitable compacted fill and/or topsoil.

3. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters.

Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other such substances adjacent to streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers.



4. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants, prevent toxic concentrations of

chemicals, and prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. 5. All Contractors’ equipment used during construction shall conform to all current federal,

state and local laws and regulations. 1.4 BULLETIN BOARD, PROJECT SIGN, AND PROJECT SAFETY BOARD

A. Bulletin Board - Immediately upon beginning site work the Contractor shall provide and install a weatherproof, glass-covered bulletin board that is a minimum of three (3) feet high by five (5) feet wide having not less than two (2) hinges or sliding glass doors with provisions for locking. The bulletin board shall be located in a conspicuous place at the project site as approved by the Owner and be easily accessible to all employees. The Contractor shall post all information required by law and the Owner. Information shall remain legible during the course of the Contract. The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by him upon completion of the Contract.

B. Project Sign - The Owner may furnish, erect, and maintain a project sign within the limits of the

project site. No other signs of any character will be permitted on the premises without written permission granted by the Owner.

C. Project Safety Board - The Contractor shall erect and maintain a Project Safety Board in a

conspicuous and easily accessible place at the project site. The board shall be sized to accommodate OSHA required/recommended postings.

1.5 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

A. Except as otherwise specifically directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction period to ensure the traveling public is protected from damage to person or property. Measures for the protection, maintenance, and diversion of traffic shall meet all the requirements of Maryland Department of Transportation and Prince George’s County. The Contractor shall be responsible to submit a Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) Plan to Maryland Department of Transportation for approval prior to any work in the Maryland Department of Transportation right-of-way.. The Contractor’s traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from the site shall interfere as little as possible with public traffic. The Contractor shall investigate the adequacy of existing roads, the allowable load limit on these roads, and be responsible for the repair of any damage to roads caused by construction operations.

B. Access Roads - The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary access to the building site

and will accomplish this per methods as approved by the Architect and the Owner so as not to interfere with work of others. When this access is no longer required the Contractor will be responsible for restoration to original or final design state.

C. Dust, Dirt, and Mud Control - At all points where vehicles leave the project site and enter adjacent

paved streets, the Contractor shall maintain a wash rack installation and crew to prevent any mud from being carried onto such adjacent paved streets. The Contractor is responsible for daily cleanup of all debris, materials, etc. that fall from vehicles entering or leaving the site.

D. Barricades - The Contractor shall erect and maintain temporary 6’-0” high chain link fence to limit

public access to hazardous areas. The barricades shall be securely placed, clearly visible, and have adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the hazard during both day and night. All barricades shall meet with the owner’s approval.



1.6 TEMPORARY OFFICE FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall provide field office(s) for his use in such size and configuration as he may require.

B. Owner’s Representative Field Office: Provide a separate 12’ x 60’ field office for the exclusive use

of Owner’s Representative configured and equipped as indicated below. Provide electrical service. 1. The Owner’s office must be separate from the contractor’s office. 2. It must be big enough for (2) offices, storage room, meeting room for 20 people and a

potable toilet. 3. It must be heated, ventilated and air conditioned. 4. All utilities shall be installed and paid for by the contractor to include (4) phone lines (2

data and 2 voice) plus a dedicated fax line and fax machine. 5. Each office shall have a desk, chairs, 4 drawer standard sized file cabinet, 2’ x 4’ tack

board and a countertop for drawings. 6. The meeting room shall have a table and chairs to accommodate 20 people. 7. A 10” thermometer shall be mounted outside the door of the trailer. 8. All doors shall be lockable and keys shall be given to the Owner’s Representative. 9. Padlock hasps shall be provided on all doors (Owner will provide padlocks.) 10. Windows shall be secured with bars. 11. Contractor shall provide bottled drinking water. 12. An indoor toilet shall be provided in the trailer. This toilet can be a travel type toilet. 13. The Contractor shall maintain the Owner’s trailer in a sanitary condition at all times and

have it cleaned once a week. 14. Trailer shall be available from within 2 weeks of Notice to Proceed to Owner Occupancy

of the project. 15. The Contractor shall provide a drawing identifying the proposed location of all trailers

and material storage locations for approval. 16. The contractor shall obtain and pay for all County required permits pertaining to all

trailers on site. 1.7 TEMPORARY SITE PARKING

A. Construction personnel will not at any time park on any private property without the prior express consent of the property owner. Contractor will be restricted to public parking or space on site as available. Off-site parking should be made in accordance with local laws. Contractor personnel violating this stipulation do so at their own risk and should be aware that their vehicles may be towed at offender’s expense.

1.8 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AIDS

A. Construction Elevators and Hoists - The Contractor shall provide cranes, hoists, towers and other lifting devices for proper and efficient movement of materials and shall provide properly trained and licensed operating personnel for the equipment. Equipment shall be provided with guys, bracing, and other safety devices in accordance with local and Maryland codes. Remove towers and hoisting equipment when no longer needed or as directed. All lifting devices and hoisting facilities must be approved by Prince George’s County prior to use on the job site.

B. Scaffolding and Platforms - Provide, erect, maintain, and remove when directed, all scaffolding,

staging, platforms, temporary runways, temporary flooring, guards, railings, stairs, etc., as required by local agencies having jurisdiction for protection of workmen and public. Construction



inspection and maintenance of these items shall comply with all safety codes and regulations as applicable to the project.

C. Temporary Fences and Barricades - The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain all

necessary temporary fences, barricades, trench and hole covers, warning lights and all other safety devices necessary to prevent injury to persons and damage to property. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain all temporary barricades at the excavations of the building and openings through floor slabs. The Contractor shall secure the site with a temporary six foot (6’-0”) chain link fence and a minimum of two gates for security and safety purposes. This fence should be indicated on the Site Utilization Plan for Owner approval. Contractor shall maintain ownership of the fence and remove it upon completion of the project. Any adjustment to the fence or gate locations during construction to facilitate site access or construction operations will be done at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Temporary Pumping - The Contractor shall provide all temporary pumping and dewatering

necessary for Contract performance.

1.9 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES

A. General Contractor shall furnish and install temporary enclosures, doors and transparent plastic windows required to protect building from damage due to vandalism, or the elements, or to maintain suitable temperature during installation or finishing work.

B. Provide all items required to ensure safety of individuals on site.

1.10 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION

1. Provide fire protection and prevention in accordance with all

applicable Federal, State and local codes and regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.

3. Comply with NFPA 241. 4. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and fire-protection program for

personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct construction personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

5. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 6. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. All flammable liquid and material shall be properly stored in UL listed containers,

properly handled, and kept to an absolute minimum at the site. 8. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses as necessary for fire protection. Hang hoses with

a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

9. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, and other fire-fighting equipment, as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

10. Fire Exits: Maintain, for the entire length of the Work, all required exits to conform with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction

1.11 CLEANUP



A. All construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the like shall be removed from the work site daily. Should the Contractor not keep the site clean to Owner’s satisfaction, the Owner reserves the right to have the site cleaned by a third party and recover the cost of such operation through back charges to the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)


FIELD ENGINEERING 01 50 01-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 5001 – FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all coordination and field engineering to meet

all regulatory requirements in accordance with applicable codes and contract provisions. 1.2 Where work is not specifically indicated, the Contractor is to furnish and install all supplementary or

miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION

A. Schedules - The Contractor is responsible for maintenance and coordination of all schedule activities resulting in timely completion of the project within the limits specified in Contract Section C Article 4. No time lost due to the Contractor’s failure to effectively coordinate work activities shall become the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

B. Coordination of Trades - The Contractor is to furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and

services necessary for all work as indicated in accordance with the provisions of the contract documents. Completely coordinate the work of all trades/subcontractors, and the Owner.

C. Field Dimensions - The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate generally the design

and arrangements of all equipment, apparatus, fixtures, accessories, etc., to complete the installation of all systems. The exact location or arrangement of equipment, unless otherwise dimensioned, is subject to minor changes necessitated by field conditions or differences between manufacturers and shall be made as required without additional cost to the Owner. Measurements shall be verified by actual observation at the construction site and the Contractor shall be responsible for all of his work, and that of his subcontractors, fitting into place in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner to the approval of the Owner.

D. Material and Equipment Delivery and Inspection

1. Deliver products in accordance with the accepted current progress/construction schedule and coordinate to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the site.

2. Deliver embeds and templates sufficiently early to permit setting prior to placement of structural concrete.

3. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original container or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. Include on label date of manufacture and shelf life, where applicable. Include UL labels on products so specified.

4. Unload products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Remove damaged products from the site and expedite delivery of identical new undamaged products and remedy incomplete or lost products to provide that specified, so as not to delay progress of the Work.

E. Material and Equipment Handling, Storage, and Protection



1. Handle products in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions, and in a manner to prevent damage. Store products, upon delivery, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with labels intact and legible, in approved storage yards or sheds provided in accordance with Contract requirements. Provide manufacturer’s recommended maintenance during storage, installation, and until products are accepted for use by the owner.

2. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. Keep running account of products in storage to facilitate inspection and to estimate progress payments for products delivered but not installed in the Work.

3. Store electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and equipment with bearings in weather tight structures maintained above 60 degrees F. Protect electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and insulation against moisture, water, and dust damage. Connect and operate continuously all space heaters furnished in electrical equipment.

4. Store fabricated products aboveground, on blocking or skids, and prevent soiling or staining. Store loose granular materials in a well drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

5. Store finished products that are ready for installation in dry and well ventilated areas. Do not subject to extreme changes in temperature or humidity.

6. No products that are to be incorporated in the Work shall be used by the Contractor for other construction activities unless specifically permitted in the Contract documents or approved by the Owner in writing.

7. Hazardous Materials: Prevent contamination of personnel, the storage building, and the site. Meet the requirements of the product specifications, codes, and manufacturers instructions.

F. Existing Utilities Services

1. The Contractor shall coordinate activities to minimize any outage times for associated utilities. Interruption shall be at approved sections of the utilities. In some cases, the Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service. The existing utilities services may be interrupted only when approved by the Owner and the associated Utility Company. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at least seven (7) calendar days in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted. The Contractor shall not proceed with such work until he receives written approval from the Owner. The interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. No part of time lost due to the Contractor’s failure to properly plan and coordinate utility interruptions shall become the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

2. When crossing under, or working adjacent to any existing utilities, the Contractor is responsible for protection of those existing utilities. The cost of such protection is to be included in the base bid. The Contractor at his expense will repair any damage to existing utilities. The Contractor will also be responsible for digging test pits to locate any/all suspected underground utilities prior to beginning any construction. The Contractor shall also be responsible for coordination with all associated utility companies.

3.2 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Layout - Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of existing conditions shall be verified by

the Contractor. Discrepancies between drawings, specifications, and existing conditions shall be



referred to the Architect for adjustment before affected work is performed. Failure to make such notification shall place responsibility upon the Contractor to carry out the work in a satisfactory, workmanlike manner.

B. Controls - The Contractor shall preserve all the property corners established by the Owner. Any

property corner monumentation destroyed during construction shall be replaced at the expense of the contractor by a Licensed Land Surveyor. A statement of certification of property corner placement shall be prepared by the Licensed Land Surveyor and provided to the Owner before completion of the contract. The Contractor shall preserve all control points and bench marks established by the Owner.

C. Stakes and Grades - The Contractor shall employ a Licensed Land Surveyor or Professional

Engineer competent in Land Surveying to stake out all of the construction. This stake-out shall include rough grade stakes in sufficient number so that the site can be accurately graded to meet the intent of the drawings. Stakes for final grading shall be set and cut-sheets shall be issued for all utilities, transportation, facilities, and site improvements. For all sanitary and storm sewers and all pavements, curbs, and gutters, the stakes shall be set at minimum fifty (50) foot stations and at all odd pluses. The cut sheets shall be submitted to the Owner/Architect no later than twenty-four (24) hours prior to the start of construction. Subgrade elevations may be checked by the Owner upon Contractor’s completion of subgrade excavation and embankment in areas to be paved. Grade stakes indicating the finished compacted surface of the base course shall be set prior to installing base material. The Contractor shall save all such stakes. In cases when grades are 1% or less; structure, curb/gutter, and invert elevations shall be spot checked by Contractor’s Licensed Land Surveyor prior to final paving and/or before final site restoration (depending if the work is in the street or yard). This is in addition to the final as-built information to be submitted and reviewed. The Owner/Architect is to approve such pre-pavement and pre-restoration survey data prior to further work on those activities. The Contractor shall perform the following:

1. Layout building corners including the erection of batter boards 2. Provide datum bench for the use of all work 3. Layout of column center lines 4. Layout of all site work 5. Layout of building/footing excavations 6. Layout of interior partitions on concrete slab

a. As soon as possible after completion of floor slab, and prior to any partition being done, lay out the entire full-scale floor plan for each floor area.

b. Layout shall be made by snapping distinct and readable chalk lines or by painting lines, indicating the accurate thickness of walls and partitions, locations and swings of doors, and similar physical features. Appropriate subcontractors shall add locations of switches, outlets, sinks, etc. Lines shall then be covered with a heavy coat of clear varnish and maintained to be readable by all trades until completion of the area. In those areas where the final floor finish is exposed concrete all layout shall be by non-staining tape and notes on tape or by other approved means.

c. After floor layouts have been made, the Contractor or appropriate subcontractor shall be responsible for field checking room dimensions, wall thicknesses, switch locations and dimensions of buit-in equipment, and similar items of critical nature.

d. As soon as door frames have been erected, attach to the head of each frame a typewritten card indicating room name and number; finishes for floor, base, wall, and ceiling; and ceiling height.



3.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Code Compliance - The Contractor shall comply with the code requirements, ordinances, and laws of Prince George’s County, the Maryland, or Federal agencies as applicable. Violations shall be corrected within 24 hours from receipt of notice of violation. The Contractor is responsible for insuring that necessary inspections are made with respect to the County Building Code and applicable County ordinances. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that inspections are requested in a timely manner, and that inspections are made and approvals granted. No part of time lost due to Contractor’s failure to properly schedule inspections shall become the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

B. Work in the Maryland Department of Transportation Right-of-Way – The Contractor is required to

comply with the General Requirements for work in the Maryland Department of Transportation right-of-way as outlined in the latest edition of the Maryland Department of Transportation manual for this work. This includes, but is not limited to; the Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) Plan, pavement cut procedures, milling and patching, and utility work in the right-of-way. Upon completion of all the work in the Maryland Department of Transportation right-of way, the Maryland Department of Transportation personnel will conduct an inspection and issue a punch list. The Contractor will be responsible for the completion of those items on the punch and a written release of the Maryland Department of Transportation Permit.



SOIL EROSION 01 57 20-1 AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 5720 - SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 1. PART 1 - GENERAL: 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, Specification Sections apply to work in this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. This section specifies materials and work required to construct soil erosion and sediment control measures.

1.3 RELATED WORK:

A. Refer to Division 31 and 32. 1.4 CODES:

A. Comply with the Code of Maryland "Erosion and Sediment Control Law".

B. Comply with the Maryland Regulations Erosion and Sediment Control Regulations. 1.5 STANDARDS:

A. Maryland Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, current edition.

B. Maryland Department of Transportation's current "Road and Bridge Specifications". 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Refer to Section 310000 "Earthwork and Grading" and as noted.

B. Controls: Provide controls required to prevent soil, silt, sediment or debris from flowing onto adjacent or downstream properties, prior to or in conjunction with demolition, earthwork and utility excavation operations.

C. Temporary Soil Stabilization: Temporarily stabilize all areas, not permanently constructed upon

within 10 calendar days, after completion of clearing and earthwork operations. Temporarily stabilize topsoil and earth stockpiles and control diversions within 10 calendar days after completion of initial earthwork operations.

D. Limitations: Temporarily stabilize soil with mulch, as specified, when no seeding date is applicable.

E. Permanent Vegetation: Immediately stabilize backfilled utility trenches located beyond "Clearing and

Grading Limits" indicated and completed unpaved areas as specified in Section 329200 "Lawns". 2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS:



2.1 GENERAL:

A. Products shall be in accordance with standards specified, and as noted. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE WASH AREA:

A. Gravel: VDHT No. 1 coarse aggregate - Section 203.

B. Filter Cloth: Manufactured by Carthage Mills Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio. Type: "Filter-X". Contractor's Option: "Mirafi 100X", manufactured by Mirafi Incorporated, Charlotte, North Carolina, or approved equal.

C. Precast Concrete Washrack: Manufactured by Smith Midland Corporation, Midland, Virginia. Size to

be 20 feet by 14 feet and located as indicated.

D. Water Service: Provide a working water hose, nozzle and related equipment supplied from onsite domestic sources in accordance with Division One sections for "Temporary Facilities".

2.3 GRAVEL GRATE INLET SEDIMENT FILTER:

A. Gravel: VDHT No. 1 coarse aggregate - Section 203.

B. Filter Cloth: Manufactured by Carthage Mills Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio. Type: "Filter-X". Contractor's Option: "Mirafi 100X", manufactured by Mirafi Incorporated, Charlotte, North Carolina, or approved equal.

2.4 GRAVEL CURB INLET SEDIMENT FILTER:

A. As specified for Gravel Grate Inlet Sediment Filters. 2.5 SILT FENCE BARRIERS:

A. Fence Posts: Steel "T" or "U" channel, with punched or riveted lugs for fence attachment.

1. Weight: 1.33 pounds per linear foot. 2. Length: 60 inches. 3. Bottom end shape: Pointed. 4. Finish: Rust inhibitive primer paint.

B. Contractor's Option: Hardwood posts, two by two inches by 60 inches, with pointed bottom ends.

C. Fence Fabric: ASTM A 116, Class 1, 2 or 3, 14-1/2 gage with six inch mesh openings. Minimum

height 42 inches.

D. Filter Cloth: Manufactured by Carthage Mills Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio. Type: "Filter-X". Contractor's Option: "Mirafi 100X", manufactured by Mirafi Incorporated, Charlotte, North Carolina, or approved equal.

2.6 TEMPORARY SOIL STABILIZATION:

A. Soil Amendments: Limestone and fertilizer: Refer to Section 329200 "Lawns".



B. Seed and Application Rate: Use an approved mix from the jurisdiction's applicable Soil and Erosion Control standards, or one of the following species based on application date.

1. Seeding Date: 1 March through 14 May.

Species Rate/1000 Square Feet

Barley 2.76 lbs. Wheat 3.45 lbs. Rye 3.22 lbs. Italian Ryegrass 0.80 lbs. Spring Oats 1.84 lbs. Field Bromegrass 0.80 lbs.

2. Seeding Date: 15 May through 31 July.

Species Rate/1000 Square Feet Sudan Grass 0.69 lbs. Sorghum 0.57 lbs. Millets 0.80 lbs.

3. Seeding Date: 1 August through 1 November.

Species Rate/1000 Square Feet Barley 2.75 lbs. Wheat 3.45 lbs. Rye 3.22 lbs.

C. Mulch: Unweathered and unchopped small grain straw, free of noxious weeds.

D. Mulch Anchoring Products:

1. Organic Binder manufactured by Grass Growers, Plain Field, New Jersey. Type: "Terra

Tack I", or approved equal. 2. Organic Binder Mixture: One part organic binder to 20 parts water.

E. Hydraulic Seeding: Use seed species and related application date specified. Use fertilizer specified.

1. Fiber Mulch manufactured by Weyerhaeuser Company, Tacoma, Washington. Type: "Silva-

Fiber", or approved equal.

2. Synthetic binder additive manufactured by American Hoechst Corporation, Summerville, New Jersey. Type: "Curosol AH", or approved equal.

3. Slurry mixture for a 1000 Gallon Tank:

a. Seed: Quantity required to produce application rate specified. b. Fertilizer: Quantity required to produce application rate specified. c. Fiber Mulch: 310 Pounds. d. Binder Additive: 20 Gallons.



e. Water: Fill Tank. f. Proportionally adjust mixture quantities for tanks of different capacities.

F. Hydraulic Seeding Equipment: Provide equipment with agitation system which maintains mixture

solids in complete suspension and spray nozzles which produce even distribution of slurry mixture. 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION:

A. Refer to Section 310000 "Earthwork and Grading" and as noted.

B. Temporary Soil Stabilization: Protect improvements and facilities, during hydraulic seed application, to prevent over-spray damage.

3.2 GENERAL:

A. Installation shall be in accordance with standards specified, and as noted. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE WASH AREAS:

A. Locations: Where required. Excavate wash areas to depths indicated. Place and compact gravel to depths indicated.

3.4 GRAVEL GRATE INLET AND CURB INLET SEDIMENT FILTER:

A. Locations: Where required. 3.5 SILT FENCE BARRIERS:

A. Locations: Where required.

B. Installation: Excavate trench to four inch depth along and on upstream side of fence. Set posts 10 feet on center and drive plumb to 14 inch depth. Stretch fence fabric between and on upstream side of posts. Securely fasten fabric to steel posts with tie wire. Securely fasten fabric to hardwood posts with tie wire or staples. Place filter cloth in excavated trench and securely fasten to fence fabric with tie wire.

1. Tie wire locations: Top and middle of filter cloth. 2. Tie wire spacing: 24 inches on center. 3. Backfill excavated trench and compact.

3.6 TEMPORARY SOIL STABILIZATION:

A. Mulching: Apply mulch when no seeding date is applicable. Minimum application rate: 70 pounds per 1000 square feet. Maximum application rate: 90 pounds per 1000 square feet.

B. Anchor mulch: Apply organic binder mixture, uniformly over mulch, in accordance with

manufacturer's application instructions. Mixture application rate to be 18 gallons per 1000 square feet.



C. Hydraulic Seeding Method: Apply limestone uniformly to soil surface prior to slurry application. Application Rate: 46 Pounds per 1000 square feet. Harrow or disc limestone into soil to three inch depth. Apply slurry mixture uniformly to prepared soil surface. Application rate: 100 Gallons per 1000 square feet.

3.7 MAINTENANCE:

A. Maintain soil erosion and sediment controls, to project completion date, at no increase to contract sum. Remove silt and debris accumulations at regular intervals. Remove and replace gravel or provide additional gravel top dressing as directed by the Architect or the Owner’s Representative.

3.8 REMOVAL:

A. Obtain written authorization from the following, before removing soil erosion and sediment controls:

1. Prince George’s County Sediment Control Inspector. 2. The Architect. 3. The Owner's Representative.

B. Remove controls when the following is provided and written authorization is received.

1. Unpaved areas: Stabilized with full stand of permanent vegetation as specified in Section

329200 2. Paved Areas: Temporarily stabilized or completed.

C. Grade areas affected by removal operations to existing or finish grades indicated. Stabilize areas

affected by removal operations as indicated and specified in Section 329200 3.9 CLEANING:

A. Clean improvements and facilities, damaged by hydraulic seed application overspray, as directed by the Architect or the Owner's Representative.


PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 7000 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included:

1. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner to provide a smooth transition of the Work from the Contractor responsibility to Owner’s Acceptance of the project and/or portions thereof.

2. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all project closeout tasks as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.

3. Coordinate with work of all other trades. 4. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or

miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to this section.

B. The Owner reserves the right to use or occupy the building or any part thereof, or to use equipment

installed under this Contract, prior to final acceptance of the work or any part thereof.

C. Within 30 days of completion of the project, the Contractor shall arrange to make up to 20% of the floor available where the Owner's equipment may be stored and securely locked. The contractor shall provide locking devices and/or keying accessible only to the Owner's representatives.

PART 2 - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PREREQUISITES 2.1 SUMMARY

A. Before requesting inspection for a Certificate of Substantial Completion the Contractor shall complete the following:

1. Submit one (1) check copy of Electrical O&M Manuals (Division 16). 2. Submit one (1) check copy of Mechanical O&M Manuals (Division 15). 3. Submit one (1) check copy of Architectural O&M Manuals (Division 2 – 14). 4. Submit one (1) check set of black line prints of the "as-built" contract drawings.

Drawings from all disciplines shall be included in this submittal 5. Obtain a certificate of final inspection from city, county and/or state agencies in accord

with applicable codes, laws and ordinances. 6. Obtain any partial or full occupancy permits required by local authorities. 7. Perform the first final cleaning as described herein. 8. Obtain inspection of fire protection system (sprinkler system) by the Fire Marshal's office

and Owner's Insurance Rating Bureau plus correction of any deficiencies. 9. Provide fully operated HVAC system with air balance testing and noise level testing



complete and deficiencies corrected. 10. Provide electrical systems fully operating, inspection and acceptance by appropriate

authorities. 11. Complete all labeling as required in the Specifications. 12. All safety devices shall be fully operational. 13. All pressure vessels must be inspected and approved by appropriate state and local

authorities. 14. The Health Department must have inspected the facility and any corrections completed to

their satisfaction. 2.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Summary: To aid the continued instruction of operating and maintenance personnel, and to provide a positive source of information regarding the products incorporated into the work, the contractor shall furnish and deliver the data described in this section and in pertinent other sections of these Specifications.

1. As the commissioning process requires detailed O&M documentation, Division 1 is

alerted to the O&M documentation requirements identified in this section, in Section 17100 and other referenced sections.

2. The commissioning agent’s contribution to the O&M manuals is found in Section 17100.

B. Quality Assurance: In preparing data required by this section, use only personnel who are

thoroughly trained and experienced in the operation and maintenance of the described items, completely familiar with the requirements of this section, and skilled at communicating the essential data.

C. Prior to the Substantial Completion inspection, the Contractor shall prepare One (1) copy of each

of the maintenance manuals and deliver them to Architect. The manuals must be approved by the Architect, all applicable engineering consultants and the Owner and will not be accepted as final until so stamped. After the manuals have been approved by all of the above parties the Contractor shall provide Five (2) hard copies and Two (2) copies on compact disc in PDF format. These copies of the final version of the O&M manuals shall be sent directly to the owner.

D. The Contractor shall assemble the data indicated below and other data required to completely

describe operation and maintenance procedures. O&M information for every piece of equipment and building operating or electrical system shall be provided without exception.

E. The contractor shall bind data in a three-ring, loose-leaf binders similar to "National" metal hinge

or approved equal, with the following title lettered on the front "Maintenance Manual, (Name of Project)." Sheets larger than 8½ inches by 11 inches shall not be used, except for sheets neatly folded to 8½ inches by 11 inches and used as a pull-out. Index material by Specification section with index dividers. Index dividers shall be permanently marked tabs of card stock. Tab labels shall be printed, not handwritten. Provide a Table of Contents. Title of binder shall also be clearly labeled in the spine. Use as many binders as required to avoid overloading

1. There shall be a title page and table of contents in the front of each binder for each binder’s

contents. In each binder, there shall be a main tab for each specification section. Behind the section number tab there shall be the equipment ID tag sub-tab for each piece of major



equipment (or group, if small or numerous). These sub-tabs shall be similar to the specification number tabs but of a different color. Behind each equipment name tab shall be the following sections, in the given order, divided by a double weight colored sheet labeled with the title of the section.

a. Contractor. The first page behind the equipment tab shall contain the name, address

and telephone number of the manufacturer and installing contractor and the 24-hour number for emergency service for all equipment in this section, identified by equipment.

b. Submittal and Product Data. This section shall include all approved submittal data, cut sheets and appropriate shop drawings. If submittal was not required for approval, descriptive product data shall be included.

c. Operation and Maintenance Instructions. These shall be the written manufacturer’s data with the model and features of this installation clearly marked and edited to omit reference to products or data not applicable to this installation. This section shall include data on the following:

1. Installation, startup and break-in instructions 2. All starting, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, manual operation, seasonal

changeover and normal operating procedures and data, including any special limitations.

3. O&M and installation instructions that were shipped with the unit. 4. Preventative maintenance and service procedures and schedules. 5. Troubleshooting procedures. 6. A parts list, edited to omit reference to items which do not apply to this

installation. 7. A list of any special tools required to service or maintain the equipment. 8. Performance data, ratings and curves. 9. The Warranty, clearly lists the conditions to be maintained to keep the warranty

in effect and conditions that would affect the validity of the warranty. 10. Any service contracts issued.

F. The contractor shall identify each item in a manner consistent with names and identification

numbers used in Contract Documents, not with manufacturer's catalog numbers.

G. The Contractor shall neatly type all data not furnished in printed form.

H. The Contractor shall organize data for ease of reference.

I. In preparing the Maintenance Manuals, the Contractor shall include the following:

1. A list of all subcontractors and material suppliers. Indicate trade and submit the name and address of each.

2. Information to be included in, but not limited to, the O&M Manuals is as follows:

(a) Emergency instructions. (b) Spare parts lists. (c) Wiring diagrams. (d) Recommended "turnaround" cycles. (e) Inspection procedures. (f) Shop Drawings and Product Data.



(g) Fixture lamping schedule.

3. A complete description of each mechanical, electrical and architectural system in the project and other items as hereinafter outlined. Include complete operating and maintenance instructions on each piece of equipment in the building, as hereinafter described, the name, address and telephone number of each subcontractor that installed the system, and the name, address and telephone number of the local representative of each piece of equipment installed in the building. The manual shall list all equipment with maintenance periods and schedules and maintenance procedures.

J. Description of Electrical System Manual:

1. Provide Record Drawings of the service entrance equipment which include all revisions. 2. Catalog data on each electrical panelboard, motor control center, and switchboard in the

building. 3. Provide a record riser diagram of the complete electrical power distribution system. 4. Provide record panel schedules with directories of circuits. 5. Provide cuts of all lighting fixtures with drawing designations indicated. 6. Complete description, wiring diagrams and instructions of any smoke/fire detection

systems or alarms and any required certification of compliance and testing. 7. Complete description, wiring diagrams and instructions of any security or other special

systems. 8. Additionally, provide all information, documents, or instructions required in the

individual sections of Division 16.

K. Description of Mechanical System Manuals:

1. Catalog data on each piece of plumbing equipment furnished. 2. Maintenance and lubrication instruction on each piece of equipment furnished; these

instructions must be on the letterhead of the manufacturer of the equipment. 3. A record temperature control diagram by control manufacturer. 4. List each temperature control used by manufacturer and model number. 5. Description and operating manual of sprinkler system and certificate that all required tests

on the system have been performed. 6. Vent Heads: Make, model, number and representative. 7. Ventilating and Exhaust Fans: Make model number, size and representative. 8. ATC drawings.

L. Description of Architectural Manuals:

1. At a minimum, provide O&M information for every specification section in divisions 2

through 14 M. Supplemental Data: Prepare written text and/or special drawings to provide necessary information,

where manufacturer’s standard printed data is not available and information is necessary for a proper understanding and operation and maintenance of equipment or systems, or where it is necessary to provide additional information to supplement data included in the manual or project documents.



N. Control Drawings: Include the control drawings for the piece of equipment and its components including the sequence of operation. This section will be provided by the controls contractor. The drawings will be repeated in the control contractor’s O&M submittals.

O. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: This section shall include a list of the location by O&M

document name and page number of the any preventative maintenance instructions applicable to this piece of equipment.

2.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Summary:

1. Throughout progress of the work, the Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents, as described in this section.

2. Upon completion of the work, transfer the record changes to final sets of Record Documents, as described in this section. Cross-reference all changes to addenda, Change Orders, etc.

3. Conversion of Schematic Layouts:

(a) In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout.

(1) Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to

the A/E's approval. (2) However, design of future modifications of the facility may require

accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings.

(b) Show on the job set of Record Drawings, by dimension, the centerline of each

run of items such as described in this section.

(1) Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "cast iron drain," "galv. water," and the like.

(2) Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item ("under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like).

(3) Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications.

B. Project Record As-Builts

1. Maintain at the job site one (1) set of architectural, structural, electrical, plumbing and

mechanical drawings and specifications, for the purpose of recording actual as-built information.

2. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition. 3. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. 4. Update changes on weekly basis. 5. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Architect and Owner. 6. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD". 7. Do not allow any work to be permanently concealed until required information has been



recorded. 8. Contract Drawings: Mark legibly to record actual construction, including but not limited

to:

(a) Depth of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. (b) Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances

referenced to permanent surface improvements. (c) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction

referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. (d) Field changes of dimension and detail. (e) Changes made by Change Order or field order. (f) Have skilled draftsman make all changes and insertions from field-marked set on

the record set of documents.

9. Specifications and Addenda: Mark legibly by hand or type on each section to record changes made by Change Order, Field Order, substitution or any other changes.

10. At completion of project and prior to final payment, deliver final record as-builts to Architect at Architect's office, or other designated location. Refer to Section 01700, paragraph 2.3 D, Final Project Record Documents for proper procedure.

11. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, containing:

(a) Date. (b) Project title. (c) Contractor's name and address. (d) Title and number of each Record Document. (e) Certification from the contractor that each document as submitted is complete

and accurate.

C. Quality Assurance

1. Assign the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the A/E.

2. Accuracy of Records:

(a) Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of the specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly.

(b) Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the contract documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents.

D. Final Project Record Documents

1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information

regarding all aspects of the work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination.

2. Thirty days prior to Substantial Completion of the work, secure from the A/E at cost for reproduction to the Contractor one complete set of transparencies of all drawings in the



Contract. 3. Approval of recorded data prior to transfer:

(a) Following receipt of the transparencies described in this section, and prior to start of transfer of recorded data thereto, secure the A/E's approval of all recorded data.

(b) Make required revisions.

4. Transfer of data to drawings:

(a) Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings to the corresponding transparencies, coordinating the changes as required.

(b) Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other drawings a full description of changes made during construction, and the actual location of items described in this section.

(c) Call attention to the entry by drawing a cloud or other shape in a manner that avoids confusion with the original shapes and elements on the drawing around the area or areas affected.

(d) Make changes neatly, consistently, and with proper media to assure longevity and clear reproduction.

5. Transfer of data to other documents

(a) If the documents other than drawings have been kept clean during progress of

the work, and if entries thereon have been orderly to the approval of the A/E, the job set of those documents, other than drawings, will be accepted as final Record Documents.

(b) If any such document is not approved by the A/E, secure a new copy of that document from the A/E at the A/E's usual charge for reproduction and handling, and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy to the approval of the A/E.

6. Review and submittal

(a) Submit the completed set of Project Record Documents (transparencies and one

set of blue lines) to the A/E for approval. (b) Participate in review meetings as required. (c) Make required changes and promptly deliver the final Project Record

Documents to the A/E.

7. Changes subsequent to acceptance (a) The Contractor has the responsibility for recording changes in the work

subsequent to final completion, except for changes resulting from work performed under warranty.

2.4 CLEANING

A. General



1. Description

(a) Work included: Throughout the construction period, maintain the building and

site in a standard of cleanliness as described in this section. Contractor shall keep areas of the Project free from accumulations of waste during course of Work and shall, upon completion of Work leave all finish surfaces and areas clean and fit for occupancy. Cleanup shall be performed as required to prevent accidents to personnel, protect all work in place, and to effect completion of the project in an orderly manner.

(b) Related work: In addition to standards described in this section, comply with the requirements for cleaning as described in pertinent other sections of these specifications and the "General Conditions."

2. Quality Assurance:

(a) Conduct daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that

requirements for cleanliness are being met. (b) In addition to the standards described in this section, comply with applicable

requirements of the operating facility and the Owner's representative. (c) Maintain project in accordance with applicable codes, safety regulations, and

insurance standards.

B. Products

1. Cleaning materials and equipment: Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standards of cleanliness.

2. Compatibility: Use only cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material.

C. Progress Cleaning

1. Perform periodic cleaning to keep the Work, the site and adjacent properties free from

accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.

2. Schedule operations in building so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly-coated surfaces.

3. Provide approved on-site containers for the collection of recyclable materials, waste materials, debris and rubbish.

4. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically. 5. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding

traffic or drainage, and providing required protection of materials. 6. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the job site, observing

requirements for fire protection, and protection of the ecology. 7. The entire site and the area between the property lines and adjoining streets grass shall be

kept cut to a maximum height of five inches. 8. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the structure or

pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using equipment and materials required to achieve the



necessary cleanliness. 9. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor and/or wall daily,

and more often if necessary, at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials are installed.

10. Provide on-site containers for the collection of recyclable materials.

D. Waste Disposal

1. Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on site is not permitted. 2. Store volatile waste in accordance with applicable codes and regulations and remove from

site daily. Disposal of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner) in storm or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways will not be permitted.

E. Substantial Completion Cleaning

1. Work included: The work includes but is not limited to the following items:

(a) Sweeping, brushing and dust control. (b) Washing. (c) Waxing and polishing. (d) Debris removal. (e) Removal of excess material, tools, equipment and scaffolding. (f) Cleaning all installed work. (g) Replace damaged or defaced items and reclean items not acceptable to Architect

or Owner to his satisfaction at no additional expense to Owner. (h) Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds; vacuum,

polish and mop floors. (i) Remove snow and ice from accesses to buildings. (j) Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction. (k) Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if air conditioning units were operated without

filters during construction. (l) Remove paper labels from glass, fixtures and equipment only after respective

items have been inspected, verified and approved to assure that each complies with requirements of specifications and drawings. Labels and plates that are permanently attached to equipment shall not be removed. Clean all permanent labels so that they are legible.

(m) See technical sections for additional cleaning requirements.

2. Quality of Cleanup: In addition to the normal requirements, the exposed surfaces of the following materials shall be cleaned as listed herein:

(a) Glass and mirrors: Remove excess glazing compound and paint. Wash and

polish. (b) Painted surfaces: Remove marks, stains, fingerprints and dirt. (c) Hardware: Clean and polish. (d) Ceramic tile: Remove spots, dirt and paint; then wash. (e) Floor tile: Remove paper cover, clean and Re-polish, wax if necessary. (f) Ceiling tiles and panels: Remove and replace all damaged or soiled ceiling tiles

and panels.



(g) Other surfaces: Remove all blemishes, leave clean, uniform and dust-free. (h) Premises and site: Remove all trash, debris and surplus excavation dirt. No

items shall be left or discarded elsewhere on the site, or on any other Owner's sites. Items that will be discarded shall be removed to authorized public dumps.

(i) Exposed slabs: Wash, scrape, and scrub, using a detergent as necessary to remove bond breaker, dirt and dis-colorations.

(j) Paving: Remove mud, dirt and trash and hose down as required. (k) Aluminum: Remove all temporary protective covering and clean. (l) Toilet fixtures and toilet accessories: Remove protective covering, spots, dirt,

paint, labels and adhesive. Wash clean.

(m) Stainless steel and other metal surfaces: Remove protective covering. Clean and polish.

3. Cleanup Time: Immediately prior to the Contractor's request for Substantial Completion

inspection of the project or any portion thereof, cleanup shall be performed. PART 3 - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION

A. Upon completion of the prerequisites listed above, the Contractor shall:

1. Submit written certification to Architect, that Project, or designated portion of Project, is substantially complete.

2. Submit list of all items to be completed or corrected to Architect. 3.2 INSPECTION OF WORK

A. The Architect will make an inspection within a reasonable time after notification from Contractor. The Architect and the Owner shall go through the entire project and list those items that are incomplete or for any reason unsatisfactory and determine if the work is substantially complete.

B. Should the Architect and Owner consider that work is substantially complete: The Architect shall

prepare a punch list of items to be completed or corrected by the Contractor in conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Should the Architect consider that work is not substantially complete:

1. He shall immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. The contractor shall complete the work, and send second written notice to Architect,

certifying that Project, or designated portion of Project, is substantially complete. 3. The Architect will then reinspect the work.

D. Should the Architect or Engineer perform re-inspections due to failure of the Work to comply with

the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor.

1. Owner will compensate Architect or Engineer for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the



Contractor.

E. Substantial Completion means that there are only small items left to perform or provide, constituting less than 5% of the work remaining and that the Owner make take occupancy.

3.3 ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When the Architect concurs that the Work is substantially complete, he will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion for the signatures of Owner and Contractor, accompanied by the Architect's list of items to be completed or corrected.

B. The Contractor will complete all items on the punch list within thirty (30) days after the Date of

Substantial Completion.

C. The Owner shall have the option to correct or conclude by others any punch list item not completed by the Contractor on the thirtieth (30) day after the Contractor receives the punch list. The cost of the work by others shall be deducted from the final payment.

D. The date of the Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be the date from which all warranties

and guarantees commence, provided that the Contractor agrees to complete all items on the punch list within a specified thirty (30) days. If all items are not completed within 30 days, then all warranties and guarantees required in these specifications will become effective upon issuance of final payment for the project. It shall also state security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the work, and insurance.

E. The issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion does not indicate final acceptance of the

project by the Owner, and the Contractor is not relieved of any responsibility for the project except those outlined by the document.

3.4 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. In the event that the Owner wishes to occupy a portion of the Work prior to the completion of the whole, the Owner will notify the Contractor who will set up an inspection of that portion so that it can be completed and turned over for use.

B. Should the Owner occupy the work or any portion thereof prior to its completion by the Contractor

and acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor for that portion of the work not occupied by the Owner unless cleaning is required due to cause or effect by Contractor's ongoing construction.

C. After Owner occupancy, the Contractor shall at no time cut off fire protection and safety systems

without 24 hour notification. 3.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner all maintenance materials, spare parts, tools and "attic stock," as required by the Specifications, within seven (7) days after the Date of Substantial Completion.



B. The above items shall be packed in boxes clearly identifying:

1. The trade name and stock number. 2. Where item material is to be used. 3. The name, address and phone assurance of closest supplier.

3.6 EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION AND OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION

A. Within seven (7) days after the Date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor is to provide demonstrations and instructions for all equipment and systems for which operating and maintenance data is required.

B. Do not begin demonstrations until the component, assembly or system being demonstrated has

been tested as specified and is in satisfactory operating condition. If seasonal limitations prevent demonstration of certain equipment, these demonstrations and instructions will be postponed to an appropriate time as directed by the Architect or Owner.

C. Demonstrations and instructions by the Contractor shall include:

1. Inspection and satisfactory operation, in presence of Architect, Owner's independent

commissioning agent and Owner, of each system and item of equipment, including accessories.

2. Instruction of Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.

(a) Provide all necessary instruction of maintenance staff to satisfaction of Owner and Owner's independent commissioning agent.

3. Explanation of operating and maintenance manuals. 4. Tour of building areas involved and identify:

(a) Maintenance points and access. (b) Control locations and equipment.

5. Explanation of operating sequences.

(a) Identify location and show operation of switches, valves, etc., used to start, stop

and adjust systems. (b) Explain use of flow diagrams, operating sequence diagrams, etc. (c) Demonstrate operation through complete control cycle and full range of

operation in all modes, including testing and adjusting relevant to operation.

6. Explanation of control equipment, including temperature settings, switch modes, available adjustments, reading of gages, and functions that must be serviced only by authorized factory representatives.

7. Explanation of troubleshooting procedures.

(a) Demonstrate commonly occurring problems. (b) Note procedures which must be performed by factory personnel.



8. Explanation of maintenance procedures and requirements.

(a) Point out items requiring periodic maintenance. (b) Demonstrate typical preventive maintenance procedures and recommended

typical maintenance intervals. (c) Demonstrate other commonly occurring maintenance procedures not part of

preventive maintenance program. (d) Identify maintenance materials to be used.

9. Furnishing all tools required.

3.7 FINAL CLEANING

A. The Contractor will maintain the cleaning of the site and structure as described in "Substantial Completion Cleaning." Any additional cleaning required due to continued work (i.e., punch list or Change Orders) is the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. The contractor will not be responsible for damage or additional cleaning due to full or partial

occupancy, by the Owner, after substantial completion.

C. The Contractor will remove all fencing, trailers, signs, etc., installed by this contract. 3.8 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following:

1. Submit the final payment request as described in para. 3.10, with releases of liens and

supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.

3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect.

4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 3.9 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall submit written certification to the Architect that:

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.



3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in accordance with specification requirements,

in presence of Owner's representative and are operational. 5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection. 6. The punch list has been completed.

B. Architect will make final inspection within ten (10) days after receipt of certification.

C. Should the Architect consider that the work is not finally complete:

1. He shall notify Contractor in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second

written notice to Architect certifying that work is complete. 3. Architect will re-inspect work.

D. Should Architect or Engineer perform re-inspections due to failure of the Work to comply with the

claims of status of completion made by the Contractor.

1. Owner will compensate Architect or Engineer for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the

Contractor.

E. Upon completion of re-inspection and acceptance of all work, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final Completion.

F. The Contractor is responsible to notify the various utilities that he is no longer responsible for cost

of same. The Contractor is responsible for any cost until such time as this is done. 3.10 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Prior to submitting the Request for Final Payment, the Contractor shall submit:

1. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens:

(a) Consent of Surety to Final Payment. (b) Contractor's release of waiver of liens. (c) Separate releases or waivers of liens for subcontractors, suppliers, and others

with lien rights against property of Owner, together with list of those parties.

(1) Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims.

2. Final project record as-built sets (transparencies and three blue lines) of architectural, structural, electrical, plumbing, and mechanical drawings and specifications.

3. Written warranties, guarantees, and bonds for products and installations as required by

the specifications.

(a) Where manufacturer's standard guarantees expire before expiration date required



by Contract Documents, obtain and pay for guarantee extensions, at no additional cost to Owner.

4. A guarantee covering entire project for one year. In addition, where separate guarantees,

for certain portions of work, are for longer periods, General Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods.

B. When the Architect and Owner find the work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the

Contract fully performed, the Contractor will promptly submit a Final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of their knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections, the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Document.

3.11 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Summary

1. Compile specified Warranties and Bonds. 2. Co-execute submittals when so specified. 3. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. 4. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner.

B. Related Work

1. See General Conditions for:

(a) Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond. (b) General Warranty of Construction: Conditions of the Contract.

2. Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Warranties and Bonds required for specific products: Each respective section of

Specifications. 4. Provisions of Warranties and Bonds, duration: The respective section of Specifications

which specifies the product.

C. Submittal Requirements

1. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, supplies, and subcontractors.

2. Number of original signed and notarized copies required: Two each. 3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for

each item. 4. Product or work item: Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 5. Scope: Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 6. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contact. 7. Provide information for Owner's personnel:

(a) Proper procedure in case of failure. (b) Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.



8. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.

D. Form of Submittals

1. Prepare in duplicate packets. 2. Format

(a) Size 8½" x 11", punch sheets for three-ring binder. (b) Fold larger sheet to fit into binders.

3. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS"

list:

(a) Title of Project. (b) Name of Contractor.

4. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.

E. Time of Submittals

1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during progress of

construction: Submit documents within 10 days after inspection and acceptance. 2. Otherwise, make submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to

final request for payment. 3. For items of work, where acceptance is delayed materially beyond the date of Substantial

Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period.

F. Submittals Required: Submit warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contracts as specified in

the respective sections of Specifications.

G. End of Warranty Inspection

1. The Contractor shall arrange to meet with the Architect and Owner within 30 days prior to the specified end of the guarantee period for the purpose of assimilating a list of items which require correction under specified guarantees.

2. Should the Contractor be unable or fail to schedule a meeting prior to this time, the Guarantee shall be automatically extended until such time as the meeting takes place and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for correcting such deficiencies as if they occurred under the original guarantee period.



AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION 01 71 00-1 3/2/2016

SECTION 01 7100 – AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The Contractor is to furnish all labor, materials, and data necessary to maintain and produce project As-

Built drawings and specifications in accordance with applicable Contract provisions. 1.2 Impacts resulting from the Contractor’s failure to meet As-Built requirements shall in no part become the

subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor. 1.3 The terms ‘drawings”, “contract drawings”, “drawing files”, “working as-built drawings”, and “final as-

built drawings” all refer to contract drawings which are revised to be used for final as-built drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 AS BUILT POSTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall revise paper drawings and specifications by red-line process to show the as-built conditions during the execution of the project. These working as-builts shall be kept current on a weekly basis and at least one set shall be available for review at the jobsite at all times. Changes from the contract documents which are made in the work or additional information which might be uncovered in the course of construction shall be accurately and neatly recorded as they occur by means of details and notes on the drawings. The working as-built documents will be jointly reviewed for accuracy and completeness by the Owner/Architect and the Contractor prior to each of the Contractor’s monthly Applications for Payment.

3.2 PAYMENT

A. As-Built packages are line items in the Schedule of Values (reference General Conditions Sections A & E). Payment for as-built drawings and specifications will be made as a single payment after Owner/AE review and acceptance of each As-Built package submission.

3.3 CONTENT

A. The As-Built packages shall be submitted as follows:

1. As-Built Site Plan

a. The Contractor shall submit an as-built site plan prepared by a licensed Land Surveyor or licensed Professional Engineer, for review, and obtain approval by local authorities having jurisdiction for conformance with the approved site plan. The Contractor shall pay any required filing, correction, and resubmission fees at no additional cost to the Owner. Notify the Owner in writing when plan is submitted and when the local authorities have approved the submission.

b. The Contractor shall confirm all project required storm sewer systems are properly installed and acceptable to the Owner prior to the site as-built submission. The Contractor shall video all pipes, structure, and other system components and obtain approval from the Owner for the storm sewer systems. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two copies of the final approved videos on disk for all storm sewer components.



c. Submission information should minimally include the following:

1) Boundary of the site 2) Dimensional location/size of all building(s) 3) All storm sewer, sanitary sewer, and fire hydrants, showing pipe sizes, 4) lengths, top and invert elevations and percent of slope of pipe 5) Deed book and page number of any dedication and all easements 6) Location and cross-sectional survey of any storm water or bio retention

areas(s) 7) Certification by the engineer or surveyor indicating that the as-builts

conform with the approved site plan except as shown and that it represents the actual conditions on the site, and bearing his signature and Maryland Registration Number

8) Curb and gutter and/or ditch elevations 9) Survey and record topographic elevations for all paving, sidewalks,

stairs, ramps, and entrances to verify conformance with contract requirements. The County will use this specific information to confirm ADA accessibility for the site.

10) Any other pertinent information as determined by the Owner/Architect 2. Sanitary Sewer As-Built Plan

a. The Contractor shall submit a separate sanitary sewer as-builts for review, and obtain approval by local authorities having jurisdiction. Submission shall be one (1) mylar transparency and seven (7) black line printed copies. The Contractor shall pay any required filing, correction, and resubmission fees at no additional cost to the Owner. Notify the Owner in writing when plan is submitted and when the local authorities have approved the submission.

b. The Contractor is responsible to confirm all required sanitary sewer systems are properly installed and acceptable to the Owner prior to the sanitary sewer as-built submission. The Department of Public Works, Line Maintenance Division, shall video the sanitary sewer system to determine acceptability. The Contractor shall correct any and all deficiencies found during this and/or other inspections at no cost to the Owner.

3. Project Record As-Built Plans

a. The Contractor shall submit two paper sets of red-lined Contract drawings and specifications for review and approval of the Owner/Architect. The documents should be marked to reflect actual civil, architectural, structural, electrical, plumbing, mechanical, and other trades final as-built conditions of the project.

b. Label each set of documents “RECORD AS-BUILTS”. Have skilled draftpersons and typists transfer all changes, corrections, and entries.

c. Submission information should minimally include the following:

1) Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from working drawings and specifications including but not limited to fabrication, erection, material changes/substitutions, installation plans and placing details, etc.

2) Where contract drawings or specifications present options, only the option selected for construction shall be shown.



3) Changes or modifications resulting from the substantial completion or final inspections.

4) Changes or modifications brought about as a result of a Request for Information, Architect’s Supplemental Instructions, Field Order, or Change Order.

5) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

6) Final location and depth of all utilities on the property. 7) Field changes of dimension and/or detail.


EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION 01 72 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 7200 – EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The Contractor is to furnish all labor, materials, and data necessary to perform equipment demonstration

and instruction to Owner personnel in accordance with applicable Contract provisions. 1.2 Impacts resulting from the Contractor’s failure to meet the requirements for equipment demonstration and

Owner personnel instruction shall in no part become the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION / INSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor is to provide demonstrations and instructions to Owner personnel for all equipment and systems for which operations and maintenance data is required.

B. No demonstration/instruction sessions are to be held until the component, assembly or system

being demonstrated has been tested as specified and is in satisfactory operating condition. If seasonal limitations prevent demonstration of certain equipment, these demonstrations and instructions will be postponed to an appropriate time as directed by the Owner.

C. Demonstrations and instructions by the Contractor shall include:

1. Inspection and satisfactory operation, in the presence of Architect, Commissioning Agent, and Owner representatives, for each system and equipment, including accessories.

2. Instruction of Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.

a. Provide all necessary instruction to satisfaction of Owner. b. In addition to the requirements of the Technical Specifications, for all

mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and security systems provide the services of factory experts in each trade for a Five (5) day, eight (8) hour per day, classroom training session for Owner’s personnel. This training session is to be videotaped by a firm actively engaged in video tape productions. Format is to be approved by the Owner. Two (2) copies of the video production are to be provided to the Owner within fourteen (14) days after the session

3. Explanation of Operation/Maintenance Manuals 4. Review of Warranties 5. Tour of building areas involved and identify:

a. Maintenance points and access b. Control locations and equipment

6. Explanation of operating sequences

a. Identify location and show operation of switches, valves, etc., used to start/stop and adjust systems.


EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION 01 72 00-2 4/20/2016

b. Explain use of flow diagrams, operating sequence diagrams, etc. c. Demonstrate operation through complete control cycle and full range of

operation in all modes, including testing and adjusting relevant to operation.

7. Explanation of control equipment, including temperature settings, switch modes, available adjustments, reading of gauges, and functions that must be serviced only by factory authorized representatives.

8. Explanation of trouble-shooting procedures

a. Demonstrate commonly occurring problems b. Note procedures which must be performed by factory personnel

9. Explanation of maintenance procedures and requirements.

a. Identify items requiring periodic maintenance b. Demonstrate typical preventive maintenance procedures and recommended

maintenance intervals c. Identify maintenance manuals to be used

10. Demonstration in the Owner’s off-site location that the Building Automation System graphics have been installed and that the systems can be remotely controlled/monitored. For the purpose of obtaining Substantial Completion, the Commissioning Agent shall verify the graphics and remote control are functional and that all systems are in general conformance with contract requirements. Note that detailed commissioning on a seasonal basis may not be complete at this time.

11. Demonstrate to the Owner the proper functioning of the connection of the fire alarm system to the County’s Central Monitoring Station. Provide the Owner 20 days written notice prior to the need for Central Monitoring station services.



OPERATIONS, MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY MANUALS 01 73 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 01 7300 – OPERATION MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The Contractor is to furnish all labor, materials, and data to produce and submit Operations, Maintenance

and Warranty Manuals in accordance with applicable Contract provisions. 1.2 Impacts resulting from the Contractor’s failure to meet Operations, Maintenance and Warranty Manual

requirements shall in no part become the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY MANUALS

A. Prior to Substantial Completion inspection, the Contractor shall submit Operations, Maintenance and Warranty manuals. Prior to release of final payment the manuals must be approved by the Architect, mechanical, and electrical engineers, and will not be accepted as final until so stamped.

1. Contractor shall submit 1 copy of the O&M manuals to the architect for review prior to

final distribution to the owner. The architect’s review copy shall be in PDF format and shall be submitted on compact disk or via an FTP site. Do not send hard copies to the architect for review.

B. Format

1. Operation and Maintenance manual(s) shall be in the form of three-ring loose-leaf binder(s) similar to “National” metal hinge or approved equal and labeled as “Operation and Maintenance Manual”, Name of Projects, Contract Number, and Project Number. Titles shall be on each binder front cover and spline. Sheets larger than 8½”x 11” shall not be used, except for sheets neatly folded to 8½”x 11” and used as a pull-out. All included material is to be identified via a Table of Contents and indexed by specification section using index dividers.

2. All project warranties including but not limited to those for equipment, materials, products systems or installation shall be provided in the form of three-ring, loose-leaf binder(s) similar to “National” metal hinge or approved equal and labeled as “Project Warranties”, Name of Project, Contract Number, and Project Number. Titles shall be on each binder front cover and spline. Each warranty shall be identified by its respective Specification Section neatly typed in the top margin of the warranty. All included material is to be identified via a Table of Contents and indexed by specification section using index dividers.

C. Content

1. Operation/Maintenance Manual(s) – The Contractor shall include the following:

a. The Contractor shall identify each item in a manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract Documents, not with manufacturer’s catalog numbers.

b. The Contractor shall neatly type or draft all data not furnished in printed form



and shall organize data for ease of reference. c. Provide a list of all Subcontractors and material suppliers. Indicate trade and

submit the name and address of each, along with their telephone number, email address and fax number.

d. Provide a complete description of each mechanical and electrical system in the project and other items as hereinafter outlined. Include complete operating and maintenance instructions on each piece of equipment in the building, as hereinafter described, the name, address and telephone number of each Subcontractor, and the name, address and telephone number of the local representative of each piece of equipment installed in the building. The manual shall list all equipment with maintenance periods and schedules and maintenance procedures.

e. Description of electrical system:

1) Catalog data on each piece of electrical equipment in the building. 2) Provide an as-built riser diagram of the complete electrical system. 3) Provide an as-built panel schedule with directories of circuits. 4) Provide cut sheets of all lighting fixtures showing in which rooms they

were installed. 5) Description and instructions for the lighting control systems. 6) Description and instructions of any smoke/fire detection systems or

alarms and any required certification of compliance and testing. 7) Description and instructions of any security or other special systems.

f. Description of mechanical/plumbing systems:

1) Catalog data on each piece of mechanical/plumbing equipment furnished.

2) Maintenance and lubrication instruction on each piece of equipment furnished; these instructions must be on the letterhead of the manufacturer of the equipment.

3) An as-built temperature control diagram by control manufacturer. 4) List each building automation system device used by manufacturer and

model number. 5) Description and operating manual of sprinkler system and certificate

that all required tests on the system have been performed.

g. Description of flooring:

1) Name of floor material (tile, cork, carpet, wood, etc.) 2) Name and address of installer 3) Description of recommended maintenance of floor used

h. Description of Windows and aluminum storefront: Manufacturer, type, and representative

i. Description of Glass: Identify manufacturer, design or pattern, and local

representative ii. j. Description of Roofing: Identify manufacturer for all components of the roofing

system, bonding company, roofing contractor, and the serial number of all roof



warranties for the project. k. Description of Masonry materials:

1) Identify brick or selected, list name and address of brick or manufacturer and masonry contractor

2) CMU (Solite, Slag): Identify concrete masonry units used and list name and address of manufacturer

l. Description of Acoustical tile: Identify type, framing system, and give name and

address of manufacturer, local representative and Subcontractor m. Description of Ceramic tile: Identify tile selected, color, name and address of

manufacturer and installer

2. Warranty Manual(s) – Warranty information for each piece of installed equipment, item, feature of construction or system should minimally include the following:

a. Name of Item b. Model and serial numbers c. Location where installed d. Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers e. Names, addresses, and telephone/email contact information for sources of spare

parts or service f. Warranties and terms of warranty. This shall include one-year overall warranty

per the terms of the Contract. Items which have extended warranties shall be indicated with separate warranty expiration dates.

g. Cross-reference to the associated operation, Maintenance manual information h. Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the warranty in force. i. Typical response time and repair time for various warranted equipment

D. The Contractor shall also ensure that any instructions and/or operational information critical for

warranty and/or safety is posted near identified pieces of equipment. 3.2 Payment A. Operation, maintenance and warranty manuals are line items in the Schedule of Values (reference

General Conditions sections A & E). Payment for operation, maintenance and warranty manuals will be made as a single payment after Owner / AE review and acceptance of each operation, maintenance and warranty manual submission.


ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products. 4. Shear wall panels. 5. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 6. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 7. Wood furring and grounds. 8. Wood sleepers. 9. Utility shelving. 10. Plywood backing panels.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 "Sheathing"

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal) size in least dimension.

C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

D. OSB: Oriented strand board.

E. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal size or greater in least dimension.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.



1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Post-installed anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of



Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; 1. Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground 2. Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground 3. Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground]. 4. See the Evaluations for information about treatment chemicals. 5. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or

chromium. 6. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not

require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.



2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions. 3. Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls. 4. Roof construction. 5. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: No. 3 grade lumber of any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 3 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); No. 3 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA.



4. Eastern softwoods; No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA. 5. Northern species; No. 3 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods; No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an ICC evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy

Group 1 or 2

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty, Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co. 5. USP Structural Connectors

B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by



rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing anchors.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

F. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.

1. Thickness: 0.050 inch

G. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.

1. Strap Width: 1-1/2 inches 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch

H. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing.

I. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.

1. Width: 3/4 inch 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch 3. Length: 16 inches

J. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick by 36 inches long.

K. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by 9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges.

L. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 inch thick with hemmed edges.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.



B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

D. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

E. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

E. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

F. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.

G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

H. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

I. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.



2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.

J. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

K. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

L. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate

Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.

1. Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard.

2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler.

3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.



C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-) size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c.

C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 104/20/2016



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 06 4023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured wood casework. 2. Custom millwork. 3. Shop priming of interior architectural woodwork. 4. Shop finishing of interior architectural woodwork.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 6 “Rough Carpentry” for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed

to view. 2. Division 8 “Wood Doors” for door standards. 3. Division 12 Laboratory Casework sections. 4. Division 26 Electrical

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Wood-Preservative Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material and manufacturer's written warranty.

2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.



3. Waterborne Treatments: For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

B. Shop Drawings: For interior architectural woodwork.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including blocking and

reinforcement concealed by construction and specified in other Sections. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. 5. Hardware cut sheets.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and finish specified, in manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size. 1. Wood Veneer

a. Submit stained samples for Architect’s selection. Stained samples to match existing construction.

b. Minimum 2 samples of each stain. c. Minimum 5 different stains to match existing construction. d. Sample size not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut,

finished on one side and one edge. e. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for stained interior

architectural woodwork.

2. Solid Surface a. Select samples for manufacturer’s standard colors for Architect’s selection. b. Approved Manufactures: Corian or Caesarstone.


A. Qualification Data: For installer and fabricator for firms and persons specified in "Qualify Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects, as required by Part 1.4 below, with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. In addition to the list of products the manufacturer and installer shall submit information demonstrating compliance with all the requirements of 1.7 below.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program

C. Evaluation Reports: For preservative-treated and fire-retardant-treated wood materials, from ICC-ES.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer shall be a firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project. The manufacturer shall have sufficient production capacity to produce the required units without causing a delay in the Work. Manufacturer shall provide documentation that demonstrates that they have produced three jobs of similar or greater value to this one within the last five years.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.



1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant

C. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participants. Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project. Installer shall provide documentation that demonstrates that they have installed three jobs of similar or greater value to this one within the last five years.

D. Single-Source Responsibility: Arrange for production by a single firm of architectural woodwork with sequence matched wood veneers 1. Include the veneering of wood doors in the single-firm production, where veneer matching extends

across wood doors.

E. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise indicated.

F. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved scheduled for cabinet hardware specified in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" to manufacturer of architectural woodwork; coordinate cabinet shop drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.


A. Do not deliver interior architectural woodwork until painting and similar finish operations that might damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

B. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.



D. Established Dimensions: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements listed in 1.7.

2.2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard.

2.3 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Grade: Premium

B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building unless otherwise indicated.

1. Species: Match existing construction. 2. Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn 3. Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching each face of

woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.

2.4 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of interior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of interior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.



2.5 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED-WOOD MATERIALS

A. Preservative-Treated-Wood Materials: Provide with water-repellent preservative treatment complying with AWPA N1 (dip, spray, flood, or vacuum-pressure treatment).

1. Preservative Chemicals: 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC), combined with a compatible EPA-registered insecticide.

2. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material.

2.6 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively.

2. For items indicated to receive a stained, transparent, or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation.

3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency.

4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

1. Preservative Treatment: Provide softwood lumber treated by pressure process, AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.

a. Provide where in contact with concrete or masonry b. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.



c. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

d. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Complying with requirements.

B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

D. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times interior architectural woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

2.9 SHOP PRIMING

A. Interior Architectural Woodwork for Transparent Finish: Shop seal with stain, other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish to match existing construction.

B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.

2.10 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.



B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of interior architectural woodwork. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium 2. Finish: System - conversion varnish 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-

grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Match existing construction. 5. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry.

Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 6. Sheen: Flat, 15-30 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition interior architectural woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing interior architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install interior architectural woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble interior architectural woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install interior architectural woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut interior architectural woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4.

F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.



G. Anchor interior architectural woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with interior architectural woodwork.

1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.

H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of interior architectural woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective interior architectural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace interior architectural woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean interior architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior joint sealants

a. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as indicated below: 1) Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls 2) Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated 3) Joints between tops of non-load-bearing unit masonry walls and undershide of cast-

in-place concrete slabs and beams 4) Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete

walls and partititons 5) Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows 6) Perimeter joints of toilet and other plumbing fixtures 7) Joints at casework 8) acoustical applications 9) other joints as indicated

b. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: 1) Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs 2) Other joints as indicated

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 6 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for sealing joints related to solid surface 2. Division 7 Section "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction. 3. Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing” for sealants used in glazing 4. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Drywall” for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board

partitions. 5. Division 9 Section “Tiling” for sealing tile joints




JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 24/20/2016


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint sealant and substrate material to be tested:

1. Joint-sealant location and designation. 2. Manufacturer and product name. 3. Type of substrate material. 4. Proposed test. 5. Number of samples required.

D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are needed for adhesion.

E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

F. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 34/20/2016

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

C. Single source responsibility for joint sealant materials. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials.

3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with masonry substrates.

4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials.

5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective

measures, including use of specially formulated primers. 7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous

testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 44/20/2016


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications

indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 54/20/2016

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Pecora 864 NST 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 3. Contractor is responsible for purchasing minimum quantity required by the manufacturer.

B. Silicone, S, NS, 50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT. 1. Acceptable Manufacter: Pecora 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 3. Contractor is responsible for purchasing minimum quantity required by the manufacturer.

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Pecora AC-20 +Silicone 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 3. Contractor is responsible for purchasing minimum quantity required by the manufacturer.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. See Division 07 “Acoustical Joint Sealants”

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pecora

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 64/20/2016

C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F (-32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 74/20/2016

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,

harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace

them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 84/20/2016

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193 where indicated. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at according to Figure 8C in

ASTM C 1193 where indicated.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 94/20/2016

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

B. Upon completion of sealant installation, remove all associated debris, empty containers, and surplus sealant from the jobsite. Do not leave “Attic Stock” on the premises.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-3.

1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-4.

1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, walls and partitions. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement JS-5.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 104/20/2016



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work. 1. Hollow metal door frames 2. Hollow metal window frames

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 – "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 08 – “Flush Wood Doors” 3. Section 09 – “Painting”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.



C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Steel Door Institute (SDI).

C. Warranty: All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing from the manufacturer against defects and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

D. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. Otherwise, remove and replace damaged goods as directed.

E. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum four inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on doors becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide ¼” spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Apex Industries, Inc. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc.



5. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 6. DKS Steel Door & Frame Sys. Inc. 7. Fleming-Baron Door Products. 8. Gensteel Doors Inc. 9. Greensteel Industries, Ltd. 10. J/R Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc. 11. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 12. LaForce, Inc. 13. Michbi Doors Inc. 14. MPI Group, LLC (The). 15. National Custom Hollow Metal. 16. North American Door Corp. 17. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The). 18. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 19. Premier Products, Inc. 20. Republic Doors and Frames. 21. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 22. Steward Steel; Door Division.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 INTERIOR FRAMES

A. Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 860. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) for frames that receive hollow-metal doors; minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm)for frames that receive hollow-core wood doors.

b. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). c. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.



4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less

than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 - "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble



units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor;

however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610

mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610

mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1067 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.



1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types

indicated.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

B. Factory Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, complying with SDI A250.3.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.



D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field

splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly

set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to

comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing

antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between

frames and masonry with grout. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion

anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to

manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and

plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.



b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 3. STC rated doors

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 08 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 2. Division 08 “Door Hardware” 3. Division 08 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”




A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings and sound ratings for sound rated doors.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 8. Sound ratings for sound rated doors

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For wood veneer doors.

D. Samples for Verification:


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 24/20/2016

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work.

2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.

a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer required. b. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.

3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish required.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. All doors to be provided from a single source.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 34/20/2016

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.

a. Typical Door UNO: Graham GPD-PC-5 b. Sound Rated Doors: Graham Serenity Door – STC46 with required seals and threshold c. Locations: As indicated on the drawings

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and wood paneling from single manufacturer.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification. Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated.

C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extra Heavy Duty: Classrooms. 3. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets) and private toilets.

D. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or

armor plates. c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 44/20/2016

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Select White Birch. 3. Cut: Plain sliced 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor-door faces

do not need to match where they are separated by 40 feet or more. 8. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area

of building. 9. Transom Match: End match. 10. Blueprint Match: Where indicated, provide doors with faces produced from same flitches as

adjacent wood paneling and arranged to provide blueprint match with wood paneling. Comply with requirements in Section 064216 "Flush Wood Paneling."

11. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A 12. Core: Particleboard 13. Construction: seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed

before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 14. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated. 15. Locations: Reference drawings for locations. 16. Sound Rating: STC 45 at locations indicated. 17. Finish: to match existing construction. Contractor to submit samples for Architect’s selection.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species and finish as door faces. 2. Profile: Manufacturer’s standard shape.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 54/20/2016

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable

requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.6 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime faces and all four edges with stain. Seal edges of cutouts and mortises with first coat of finish.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

D. Factory finish doors where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

E. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 5, conversion

varnish 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Finish to match existing

construction. 4. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 "Door Hardware".


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 64/20/2016

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-1

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE (Secondary Master) PART I - GENERAL 1.1 BID INFORMATION

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section.

B. Products of finish hardware supplied shall only be selected from manufacturers mentioned in

this document. Hardware specified herein shall be considered precedent, and no substitutions will be entertained. The Owner, however, reserves the right to make changes at any time.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Refer to drawings, schedules and details for items requiring finish hardware. It is the intention of this section to include all finishing hardware required for the project, except for items which are specifically noted as being furnished elsewhere. Items not specifically mentioned, but necessary/required or consistent with other like conditions, must be furnished and shall be the same as like items of hardware specified.

Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary to complete the hardware work, as indicated on the drawings, specified, and as necessary or required to satisfactorily complete the project.

B. Work includes furnishing of all finish hardware items necessary to complete the work shown

on the drawings, except for those items specified to be provided under other sections of this specification. Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

Lock cylinders and keying. Locks and latches. Padlocks for roof hatches and mechanical/electrical gates. Push/Pull plates. Exit devices and panic hardware. Flush bolts. Floor closers and pivots. Surface closers. Hinges and butts/spring hinges. Stops. Protective plates. Thresholds. Weather-stripping, gasketing and silencers. Fasteners. Grills and screens. Saddles at joints in building and doors. Sliding door hardware. Bifold door hardware. Hold open hardware. Automatic door seal (door bottom). Astragels/Meeting seals. Electrical security hardware. Smoke detectors. Continuous gear hinge.



Removable mullions. Miscellaneous control devices Sound stripping

C. Work Specified Elsewhere: Work specified to be provided under other sections include the following:

Hardware for metal windows. Hardware for toilet partitions. Toilet accessories. Hardware for operable walls and accordion partitions. Venetian blind hardware. Graphics (name plates). Stair treads. Handrail hardware. Corner guards. Access door hardware. Electrical system wiring. Hardware for lockers. Hardware for factory built cabinets and casework. Hardware for unit kitchen. Hardware for elevators. Miscellaneous hardware 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. The hardware supplier/installer shall, in the opinion of the Owner, have sufficient comparable experience (not less than five years) and an organization consisting of experienced members of The Door and Hardware Institute with Architectural Hardware Consultant status to property handle, detail and service the hardware in a satisfactory manner. The supplier shall have in stock at all times sufficient material to take care of shortages and minor extras without delay. The supplier shall maintain a warehouse and office in the Washington Metropolitan area (75 mile radius) and be readily available to attend job meetings that may be required by the architect, Owner or general contractor. The definition of the Washington Metropolitan area is at the discretion of the Owner, and he reserves the right to exclude any supplier who, he feels, is too far away to provide proper service.

B. The hardware supplier shall examine all drawings, schedules, details and relevant shop

drawings, and furnish all hardware to suit. The supplier shall obtain all information required as to details, sizes, shapes, bevel thickness, etc. of doors and other items requiring hardware and make all hardware suitable for and of perfect fit as to type, style, size, thickness, hand, function, finish, etc. for each particular case. Where practical applications cannot be made with the exact types of hardware specified, obtain the Owner’s and Architect’s permission to furnish suitable types having the same operative and functional features. Hardware for application on metal doors and frames and premortised wood doors shall be made for standard templates and necessary template information furnished as required. Inform contractor promptly of estimated time and dates that will be required to process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver hardware, and to perform other work associated with furnishing door hardware for purposes of including this date in construction schedule. Comply with this schedule.

C All items to be new & in good condition, free of defects.



1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit five copies of a complete “Hardware Schedule” and product data showing all hardware to be furnished and the location for which it is intended to the Architect for review. A cover sheet shall be made part of the hardware schedule and shall list manufacturer of each item of hardware, hardware mounting heights, explanation of abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. The schedule shall include all items required for the entire project and shall cover details as to proper type of strike plates, length of spindle, hand, backset and bevel of locks, hand and degree of opening for closers, length of kickplates, length of rods and flush bolts, type of door stop and other necessary information. The contractor shall assume sole responsibility for the provisions, proper coordination and function of the finish hardware required for all openings, whether or not hereinafter listed in the detail schedule. The Architect’s and Owner’s review of the hardware schedule shall not be construed as a complete check, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any errors, deviations or omissions from the requirements needed to satisfactorily complete the project.

B. Submit schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where acceptance of hardware

schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the project construction schedule. Allow three weeks for review after the Owner receives the schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.

C. Upon review and return of the finish hardware schedule, the hardware supplier will make

corrections within two weeks and furnish necessary copies of detailed schedules and location of items to all parties concerned. Hardware supplier will also furnish product technical data sheets for each item of hardware, necessary template information and such other detailed information relative to the installation and maintenance of operating parts of this hardware to all who need them. List the hardware set number as well as the manufacturer’s set number. Organize final hardware schedule into “hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastening and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings,

both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information.

D. Samples of the specified hardware shall be submitted for approval to the Owner.

1.5 COORDINATION:

A. The hardware supplier shall consult the project drawing and details and otherwise familiarize themselves with the work to the end that all items of hardware furnished shall conform to units to which it is applied. He/she shall coordinate the hardware with other conflicting trades such as millwork metal doors and frames, etc. All doors, door hardware, and door frames are to be coordinated by ONE supplier. Any problem with delivery, interfacing or installation is the sole responsibility of the general contractor and their supplier.



B. Immediately after the award of the hardware purchase order, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to request approved shop drawings from such trades with which the hardware must be coordinated.

C. After receiving approved shop drawings, the Contractor shall promptly supply all template

information, template drawings, approved hardware schedules, etc., as may be required to facilitate the progress of the job.

D. Contractor is responsible for all means, methods, coordination and sequencing for the project. 1.6 CODE CONFORMANCE:

A. Finish hardware shall conform with all applicable codes and regulations, including requirements of:

1. ANSI 4.139 2. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows 3. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 4. Local and State Building Codes 5. UL Labeled for Rated Doors 6. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 7. SDI - Steel Door Institute 8. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute 9. IBC – International Building Code (Amended 2003) 1.7. FIRE-RATED OPENINGS:

A. Where doors are indicated as labeled assemblies, provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the type, sizes, functions and labels of doors and frames shown or otherwise required by local code, in compliance with the BOCA-National Building Code (Amended), American Insurance Association, Pamphlet No. 80 and NFPA, Standard No. 80, current editions. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGES

A. Template: Provide template produced units only that are manufactured in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.1-1988 Standards.

B. Continuous Gear Hinge: All exterior doors shall have continuous gear hinges except to

boiler rooms and outside storage rooms. Also provide continuous gear hinges on interior doors to multipurpose rooms, gymnasiums, auditoriums and media centers. Continuous gear hinges must be listed for use on 90-minute fire doors and frames as a minimum. Provide products from the following list of manufacturers:

1. Roton (Hager) #780-224HD 2. McKinney #MCK-25HD 3. Marka Products, Inc.,#FM100

C. Full Mortise Hinge: All remaining doors shall have heavyweight (minimum.190 ga.) hinges:

five knuckle, four ball bearing, dull chrome (26D), full mortise type hinges.



D. Size: Provide 4 1/2" x 4-1/2" hinges on doors to closets. Provide 4 1/2" x 4-1/2" hinges on all other doors also.

E. Number of Hinges: Provide a minimum of three hinges for doors 90" or less in height and

one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height.

F. Screws: Provide manufacturer’s standard screws. Use self-drilling structural fasteners (Drill Flex) to secure continuous hinges to grout-filled metal frames.

G. Half Surface Hinge: Provide half-surface hinges on all fire-rated wood, mineral core

doors. Use sleeve nuts and machine bolts (sex bolts) and 3” x 5” x .097 stainless steel protection plates to prevent crushing of the core materials and finished surface of the door, such as Hager No. 418.

H. Quality: Provide top commercial grade products from the following list.

1. Hager Hinge Co. 2. McKinney Products Co. 3. Stanley Hardware, Division Stanley Works. 4. Bommer Industries, Inc. 2.2 LOCKS, CYLINDERS AND KEYING:

A. LOCKS AND LATCHES:

Locks: All locks shall be heavy-duty Sargent 11 Line, “T” Zone construction with LL levers (No Substitutions), UL-labeled for use on fire doors up to and including three hours and BHMA Certified to meet ANSI A156.2 Series 4000 Grade 1. Locksets shall have an interlocking construction between the cast /machined stainless steel lock body and the seamless brass tube latchbolt. Locksets shall be non-handed design for us on 1-3/4” to 2” thick doors. Latchbolts shall be one piece stainless steel 7/8” diameter with a ½” throw standard on single doors and a ¾” throw on pairs of doors for extra security. Locksets shall fit a standard 2-1/8” bore with a 2-3/4” backset [Government 161 prep] without the use of thru-bolts. Locks requiring the use of thru-bolting will not be acceptable. Locksets shall have solid cast lever handles without plastic inserts, heavy duty wrought rose and trim and a separate rose collar that is tightened by a special spanner wrench provided with each lockset. The lever handle on the keyed secured side of the door shall have a spring loaded security lever catch. The lever handle when depressed shall fully retract the latchbolt when rotated to a 45 degree angle. Locksets shall be able to withstand 3000 inch pounds of torque applied to the lockset lever without gaining access through the keyed side of the door. Locksets shall be cycle tested per ANSI A156.2 1996 to eight million cycles without any visible lever sag and shall have a 10 year limited warranty with no service required to maintain the warranty. All locksets must be lever action with independent lever return spring. Locksets shall be keyed to the existing system as required by the owner. All locksets shall be provided with six-lobe Torx security screws with center pin at all exposed connections. Provide strike plates with curved face edges and metal strike boxes behind strike plates. Provide locksets from the following list:

1. LOCKSETS:

a. Corbin Russwin b. Sargent



B. KEYING

1. General: Contractor’s hardware supplier will meet with the Architect and Owner’s representative to ensure that all hardware instructions are understood and to mark up two (2) sets of architectural floor plans to record the proposed keying assignments. Any deviation from the instructions in this Specification must be made during this meeting and approved in writing by the Owner.

2. At existing schools where small additions or small renovations are being

constructed, it will be necessary to match the existing keying system in all new doors and provide a key cabinet for the new keys.

3. Equip all locksets with construction cylinders for temporary use during

construction. Key construction cylinders as directed by the contractor. Hardware supplier to return all temporary construction cylinders to lockset manufacturer if requested or required by manufacturer.

4. Permanent Keys and Cylinders. Pin all conventional 6 pin cylinders and cut all

keys at the factory only. Five change keys will be provided for each lockset supplied. Permanently emboss one side of the key bows with the manufacturer’s name and factory identification markings and the other side with the key control numbers (AA-1; AC-10; etc.). All permanent cylinder parts shall be stainless steel and nickel silver. All cylinders and keys are to be shipped directly to the Contractor, who is responsible for the security and installation of these items into the door locksets. Installation work will be preformed by a certified locksmith. It will include the cylinder installation per the Keyset information and inspection of the completed lockset and cylinder for proper function per the manufacture.

2.4 EXIT DEVICES:

A. All code approved exit devices are to be grade one touch-bar type and made of stainless steel construction. Devices shall have rim actuated, single point latching, that is preferred at all locations. Vertical rod, two-point latching, is not preferred for maintenance reasons and shall be avoided wherever possible, Provide pull plates on the exterior side (see 2.3B).

Provide products from the following approved list of manufacturers: Exterior Doors

1. Von Duprin 98 2. Sargent 80 Series 3. Corbin Russwin ED 5000

B. Classroom Trim. Provide exit device hardware on classroom exterior doors.

C. Attachments: All devices are to be supplied and installed with sleeve nuts and machine

bolts. Devices are to be through-bolted to the escutcheon trim for added strength and security.

D. Finish: All devices and trim shall be 32D, Satin Stainless Steel - or Architect approved

manufacturer’s standard “mostly stainless steel product” listed above.

E. Strike: Provide manufacturer’s standard curved face strike or as detailed in the hardware sets. All strike plates must have curved face. Provide metal keeper boxes behind all striker plates.



2.6 SURFACE CLOSERS: Provide closers on all interior and exterior doors except on connecting rooms within

administration suits.

A. All surface closers shall meet grade 1 or the highest level of cycle test requirements of the applicable ANSI standards. Closers shall be fully hydraulic, rack and pinion action, be constructed of hardened, high-strength cast aluminum or cast iron shell. Cylinders shall be one piece forged steel piston with a minimum diameter of 1 1/16”. Hydraulic fluid shall be non-gumming, non-freezing and not necessitate seasonal adjustments for temperatures from 120° F to -30° F. Provide hydraulic regulation controlled by temper-proof, non-critical screw valves, adjustable with a hex wrench to independently regulate backcheck cushioning and backcheck positions. Provide multi-size spring power adjustment to permit setting of power from 2 - 6. Include high efficiency, low friction pinion bearings. Closers to have delayed action and be designed to resist vandalism and tampering. Closers to be a combination closer/shock absorber stop.

B. Provide heavy-duty, non-adjustable arms with built-in heavy-duty spring to smoothly

decelerate door to a stop. Provide the manufacturer’s heaviest/high security arm.

C. All closers are to be supplied and installed with sleeve nuts, Torx screws and machine bolts. Through bolt and use Torx fasteners with center pins at all exposed connections.

D. Provide heavy-duty gauge full metal covers with a minimum of 2 Torx mounting screws.

Covers to have closed tops and bottoms. All closer adjustments shall be shielded by the cover. Provide a powder coat painted aluminum finish.

E. Options: As dictated by codes or indicated in the drawings or hardware sets, provide arm

and feature options such as adjustable delayed action, barrier free, positive stop and/or hold open arms, low profile arms, and special mounting brackets and plates. Furnish barrier free closers on all interior doors that are not UL listed.

F. All closers and accessories shall be the top of the line and carry a manufacturer’s ten- year

warranty against workmanship and materials.

G. Provide hold-open models on closers for all exterior doors.

H. Provide support plates for all doors to protect the wood veneer from being crushed by the through door closer fasteners. Locate the plates so one plate supports all of the surface closer fasteners. The plates shall be 1” larger in all directions than the layout of the fastener pattern and made from .050 thick stainless steel, holes to be shop-drilled and countersunk.

Provide closers from the following list:

CORBIN RUSSWIN DC6000 – MC SERIES LCN: 4041 SERIES NORTON: 7500M SERIES SARGENT: 351 – MC SERIES



2.8 DOOR STOPS:

A. Floor Stops: Floor stops are to be the primary door stops, every door leaf is to have either a floor, wall or overhead stop and/or a combination of stops that will prevent the locksets, hardware or door(s) from impacting with walls, cabinets or other objects. Install floor stops on floor surface, vertically plumb, below the center of the door lockset.

Provide floor stops from the following list:

Glynn-Johnson #FB 18S Rockwood #463 Trimco #1209

B. Wall Stops: Supply wall stops only in such situations where a floor stop cannot be installed,

one 3” down from the top of the door and one 3” up from the bottom of the door. An overhead stop may be required in addition to any other specified wall hardware. Wall stops (and/or overhead stops) must prevent a lockset, door hardware or exit device from impacting a wall or other hazard. Walls consisting of open frame and drywall must be re-enforced behind wall stops to prevent wall damage. Supply US26D or US32D finish.

Provide wall stops from the following list:

Glynn-Johnson #WB 11X Ives #443 Hiawatha #1320 E Rockwood #475 Trimco #1296

B. Overhead Stops: Provide heavy-duty surface-mounted (only) overhead stops where

required to prevent doors and/or closer covers from being damaged by coming in contact with cabinetry, corners of walls, etc. All stops will have a no hold-open feature, unless specified elsewhere. Stops shall incorporate a heavy-duty channel and slide arm and offset jamb brackets have tempered steel shock absorber springs that provide 5° - 7° compression before coming to a dead stop. There shall be a nylatron slide block and shock block, designed for high traffic, heavy abuse installations on interior and exterior doors. They shall be non-handed, steel channel arm and bracket, surface mounted, single action, stainless steel.

Provide overhead stops from the following list:

Rixson: 9 Series Glynn-Johnson: 90 Series Sargent 590 Series

2.10 PROTECTIVE PLATES:

A. Kick and Mop Plates: Provide two kick plates on all interior doors 10" by 1" less than door width. Plates shall be .050 stainless steel and beveled on four sides. All plates shall be prepared for and furnished with stainless steel sheet metal screws. 1. Install on both sides of door 2. 10” high 3. 1” LDW (less than door width) at paired openings and 1 ½” LDW at single doors. 4. Mount plates 1/8” from the bottom of the door.



2.11 THRESHOLDS:

A. Supply thresholds as indicated in the drawings or in the hardware sets. All thresholds shall conform to state and local building and handicap codes. Set all exterior thresholds in a full bed of joint sealant. Thresholds for floor closers shall be supplied by the floor closer manufacturer. Provide products from the following list:

1. National Guard Product No. 896 or No. 950 2. Pemko No. 2005 or No. 2001 3. Reese No. S483 or No. S256 4. Zero No. 566 or No. 565 2.12 WEATHER-STRIPPING, GASKETING AND SILENCERS:

A. All exterior openings shall be provided with tight fitting weather stripping with UL labeled gasketing. Apply gasketing to head, hinge jamb, and lock jamb. For other applications, refer to drawings and hardware sets.

1. Pemko 315 DR 2. N/G 130 NDKB 3. Reese 373 SSD

B. Door Sweeps: Provide tight fitting door sweeps on the outside of all exterior doors, all kitchen doors and as indicated in the drawings and hardware sets. Supply from the following list:

1. National Guard Products E609 DKB 2. Pemko 18100 DP 3. Reese 965 D 4. Zero 96 A

C. Door Bottoms: Provide tight fitting automatic door seal, mounted on the inside bottom of all exterior doors.

1. National Guard Products 320N 2. Pemko 420AS 3. Ultra DB044

E. Silencers: Provide silencers for all hollow metal frames, three at each single door and at each pair of doors. Not required to be listed in hardware schedule, but all door frames are required to have specified number of silencers. Provide 30 extra silencers to owner for replacements. Provide products from the following list:

1. Rockwood 608 2. Glenn Johnson GJ64 3. Ives 20

2.13 FASTENERS:

A. Fasteners shall be suitable size, quantity and of the same material and finishes as the

hardware being secured. All fasteners exposed to weather shall be corrosion-resisting steel. Use Torx head screws/bolts with center pin when possible.

1. Machine screws and tampin shields shall be furnished for attaching hardware to

concrete, stone or masonry.



2. Machine or sheetmetal screws shall be furnished for attaching hardware to metal.

3. Self-tapping screws shall be furnished for attaching kickplates to mineral core doors

and continuous hinges to steel frames.

4. Full thread screws shall be furnished for attaching butt hinges to wood core doors.

5. Sleeve nuts and machine bolts (sex bolts) shall be provided for attaching surface type closers or closer arm and interior pull handles to wood doors, all exit devices, and O.H. holders.

6. Use only machine screw expansion shields when fastening into masonry. Do not

use plastic anchors.

7. Use six-lobe Torx security screws with center pin at all exposed connections in all locksets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Contractor shall provide adequate locked storage space with shelving and be responsible for scheduled quantities of hardware when delivered to the job, and payment of invoices covering such material, when and as delivered.

B. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to hardware set number and

door number.

C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.

D. Deliver individually packaged and properly tagged finish hardware at the proper time and

location to avoid any delays in construction or installation.

E. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.

3.2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION:

A. General: Prior to installing any hardware or locksets, the architect shall arrange a meeting with the general contractor, the hardware/door/frame supplier, the owner, the lockset manufacturer’s representatives and the hardware installer to review installers’ qualifications, installation, any special

Requirements, etc. Installer must have five years minimum comparable experience in

commercial/institutional hardware installations. Contractor must provide an ASSA certified locksmith to install ASSA cylinders and inspect for proper function of locksets. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface mounted items until



finishes and painting have been completed. Protect hardware from damage until Final Acceptance.

B. Hardware mounting heights shall comply with DHI or MAMNI “Recommended Locations for

Builders Hardware” or as scheduled. If no locations are indicated on the drawings, the following location can be used to install the hardware. The contractor is fully responsible for coordinating the entire installation.

Center of Door Lever: 38" above finished floor, A.F.F. (36" elementary schools) Center of Cylinder Deadlocks: 48" above finished floor Center of Panic Bars: 36” A.F.F. Center of Push Plates: 45" A.F.F. (35" elementary schools) Upper Edge of Top Hinge: 5" below door head Lower Edge of Bottom Hinge: 10" A.F.F. Center Hinge: Midway between top and bottom hinge Floor Stops: Plumb from center of lockset

C. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper

operation of functions of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite-type if no other is recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted, per manufacturer’s instructions and lubricate to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

D. Thresholds shall be full width of openings, notch at stops and center mullions, etc., as

required, and set in full bed or butyl rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant or in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions such as to prevent seepage of water or vapor.

E. Installation by Other Trades: All electrical equipment is to be coordinated with responsible trade, with proper wire and wiring furnished and connections made under that section per NFPA & NEC.

F. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than two weeks prior to

final acceptance of the building for occupancy, the contractor and hardware installer shall make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. Replace all defective damaged, missing or stolen hardware.

G. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment

substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

H. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

I. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

3.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

A. Provide all hardware, unless otherwise specified, of the best grade, entirely free of imperfections in manufacturer and finish and guaranteed by the manufacturer to satisfactorily perform the various functions required of it for a long life under normal usage but for a period not less than five years from the date of acceptance. Metal finishes will be as specified.



B. Defective Work:

Hardware found defective in materials, fabrication, coordination or installation upon acceptance of the building will be replaced, reworked or otherwise made good as required to the Owner’s specifications at the contractors expense. All replacements and repairs to be completed before the six month inspection as in item (3.3.C) below.

The following shall also be considered as defective or unacceptable materials (But not limited to):

a. Unauthorized substitutes.

b. Items delivered with missing, broken, damaged or defective parts. c. Items of incorrect hand or function. d. Improper installation.

C. Six-Month Reinspection: Approximately six months after the final acceptance of the

building, the Contractor and the qualified ASSA certified locksmith representatives from the installer shall return to the project to test, adjust, tighten and/or replace all hardware items required to ensure the proper function and to

determine that all hardware punch-list items have been corrected. The Contractor shall replace all items that have failed due to faulty manufacturing, faulty design, poor quality materials and/or improper installation or coordination at no cost to the Owner. After the Contractor is completely satisfied that all hardware items are installed and functioning as intended for its application, he/she shall arrange a meeting with the Owner, ASSA technical personnel, the architect, the installer, the supplier and the lockset manufacturer. A walk-through of the building shall be made to ensure that all hardware items have been installed and functioning correctly.

PART 4 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE 4.1 Provide one complete hardware set with appurtenances for each opening, as indicated on the door

and frame schedule, and the hardware schedule. All product selections shall only be made from the contract documents without exception.

Parkdale High School Set: P01 – Shared Classroom Door Doors: 5C 3 Hinge T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" NRP TXS US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lockset 28 36 72 11G26 LL x MK US26D SA 1 Overhead Stop 36 59XS x 90 deg x 195 US26D SA 3 Silencer 608 RO

4.2 LIMITATION OF HARDWARE SCHEDULE: Schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the contractor; do not consider it as

entirely inclusive. Examine drawings, specifications; determine extent, hardware, quality required. Should any particular door or items be omitted in any schedule hardware group, provide such door or item with hardware, same as required for similar purposes. The contractor is responsible for complying with all regulatory requirements, management of the means, methods, sequencing, coordination and providing complete assemblies for all hardware items.



GLASS AND GLAZING 088000 - 14/20/2106

SECTION 08 8000 – GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for windows and doors 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 3. Mirror glass (1/4” thick)


1. Division 08 “Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts” 2. Division 08 “Joint Sealants”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.





B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches square. Install glass and sealant or gasket sample in a sample of the adjoining framing system in the color selected by the architect.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Manufacturers Data: for each glazing material product required including installation and maintenance instructions.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-E coatings

B. Product Certificates: For glass. 1. Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials

furnished for the project comply with the requirements. 2. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s permanent

labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Product Test Reports: For glass, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

D. Adhesion and compatibility test report. Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.



E. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards.

F. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with the

certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organization listed below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) 2. Associated Laboratories, INC. (ALI)

H. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required.

1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective

measures including the use of specially formulated primers.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: PPG Industries

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.



2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to

ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph c. Importance Factor: 1.0 d. Exposure Category: B

3. Design Snow Loads: As indicated 4. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part of the

glass. 5. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from

vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001. 6. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

7. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall comply with basic-protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on Project.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet above grade.

D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and

for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2

computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to

NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.



2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7,

"Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines

for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout

Project.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. ¼” thick.

B. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. Thickness: ¼”

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Low-E Coated Insulated Units: PPG Solarban 70XL (2) + Clear 2. Coating Type: manufacturer’s recommended clear coating for application. 3. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 4. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction



5. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Sealant Standard 1. Provide manufacturers’ standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated

which complies with ASTM C920 requirements including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. 2. Two-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, M, G, A, O. 3. One-Part Non-Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G,

A, O; and complying with the requirements for modulus and additional joint movement capability.

2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full

bead of liquid sealant.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.



D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces

B. -glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.



3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.



C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.



3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 09 5123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Acoustical tiles for interior ceilings. 2. Fully concealed, direct-hung, suspension systems.


1. Division 21 Fire Protection - for sprinkler heads in acoustical ceilings 2. Division 23 Heating and Air Conditioning - for grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical

ceilings. Retain paragraph below if cast-in-place attachment devices are required for Project. 3. Division 26 Lighting – for lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings

C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site



B. Samples: For each component indicated, for each exposed finish required, for each exposed product, and for each color and texture specified. Prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:

1. Acoustical Tiles: each type, color, pattern, and texture, 6 inches in size. 2. Concealed Suspension-System Members: 6-inch-long Sample of each type. 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type and color. 4. Seismic Clips: Full size.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:



1. Ceiling suspension-system members. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.

5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Diffusers. c. Grilles. d. Speakers. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. g. Fire alarm h. Other devices shown on the drawings

7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components adjacent to acoustical tiles. 8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal

to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.



B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations:

1. Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and its suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Directly Attached Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES

A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Standard Classroom – Armstrong School Zone Fine Fissured

a. 1713 (2x2) with 15/16” Prelude Suspension System b. 1714 (2x4) with 15/16” Prelude Suspension System c. Grid and Tile Color: White (WH)



B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.

C. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings

D. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, fully concealed, metal suspension system and accessories of type, structural classification, and finish indicated that complies with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.

C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.

F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.

G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces.

H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical tiles in-place during a seismic event.



2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."


A. Acoustical Tile Adhesive: Type recommended in writing by acoustical tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread.

B. Staples: 5/16-inch- long, divergent-point staples.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Testing Substrates: Before adhesively bonding tiles to wet-placed substrates such as cast-in-place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits.

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

C. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.



3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers

unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance

limits established by referenced standards.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows:

1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. Install tiles with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space. 3. Install tiles in a basket-weave pattern.

G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges of tiles so tile-to-tile joints are interlocked.

1. Fit adjoining tiles to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tiles for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through ceiling.



2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tiles and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.

3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion, but no tiles have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.

1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension.

2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

D. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient flooring accessories.



B. Samples: Submit all manufacturers’ standard colors for Architect’s selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.

D. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.




A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE

A. N+ Plus Wall Base

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 6 inches. To match existing base height.

E. Lengths: Coiled wall base shall be used on all walls over 4 feet in length.

F. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.



3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.



D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. Apply number of coats per manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.


RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 09 6519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Floor Tile 2. Flooring Primer 3. Flooring Self Leveler



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit full range of manufacturer’s standard colors for Architect’s selection.

D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 12 inches.

E. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch. Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.

F. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Flooring to be provided from a single source.

B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.



1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 QUARTZ FLOOR TILE

A. UpoFloor – Quartz Tiles

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C. Wearing Surface: Embossed.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Floor Leveling and Patching Compound: Schonox AP, 1/8” minimum thickness. Installer to have on-site training with the manufacturer prior to installation.

B. Floor Primer: Schonox VD. Floor preparation and installation per manufacturer’s recommendations

C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.



2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer.

D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

E. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

F. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.



G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

I. Seamless Installation:

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.

2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on flooring surfaces.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. Floor polish per manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Joint Sealant: per manufacturer’s recommendations

F. Sealers and Finish Coats: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid cleaners, sealers, and finish products. Per manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY, MARYLAND PUBLIC SCHOOLS PRINCE GEORGE’S COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS PARKDALE HIGH SCHOOL MILITARY STUDIES

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Gypsum board. 3. Hollow metal frames. 4. MEP items called out in the drawings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry” 2. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” 3. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.



2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit architectural floor plans with paint designations on all items to be painted. Submit MEP plans with designations on all items to be painted.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Sherwin Williams; Benjamin Moore; PPG

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.



2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do

not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.



D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other

paintable jacket material. i. Other items shown on the drawings.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other

paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.



C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Eggshell at all walls / Semi-gloss at toilet rooms, kitchens, and laundry rooms

a. 1st Coat: Sherwin Williams – Harmony Interior Primer B11W900 – 0 VOC b. 2nd Coat: Sherwin Williams – Harmony Interior Latex B9W900 Series – 0 VOC c. 3rd Coat: Sherwin Williams – Harmony Interior Latex B9W900 Series – 0 VOC

B. Hollow Metal Substrates: 1. Semi-gloss

a. 1st Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66-310 Series b. 2nd Coat: Sherwin Williams Centurian Water Based 2K Urethane B65 700 c. 3rd Coat: Sherwin Williams Centurian Water Based 2K Urethane B65 700

C. CMU Substrates: 1. Eggshell

a. 1st Coat: Sherwin Williams PrepRite Block Filler B25W25 b. 2nd Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex B9W900 Series c. 3rd Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex B9W900 Series



MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS 10 11 00-1 4/20/2016

SECTION 10 1100 – MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section includes the following: All markerboards and tackboards as indicated on the furniture

plans. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Division 1 Section – “Submittals”. B. Shop Drawings: indicating size, length, joints and location of each piece. Indicate mounting

conditions by showing adjacent wall construction and required fasteners. C. Product data: for each type of markerboard and tack board. D. Samples: showing manufacturer's color charts for each type of markerboard and tack board. E. Cleaning Instructions: for O&M Manual. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty agreeing to replace markerboards which have lost original writing and

erasing qualities. B. Warranty Period: 50 years. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Markerboards and tackboards shall be provided by a single manufacturer. B. Contractor shall, upon request by Architect or Owner's Representative, disassemble one board of

each type specified in order to demonstrate that all components comply with requirements of this Section.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store in a secure area, protected from weather and unauthorized access. Follow

Manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS



B. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. (Basis of specification) 2.2 MARKERBOARDS A. See Floor Plans for locations and sizes. Markerboards shall be as follows: B. Markerboards shall be constructed of a porcelain enameled steel surface, 7/16” MDF core, and

sheet aluminum backing sheet permanently laminated together. 1. Porcelain writing surface shall be a vitreous ceramic baked-on 24 gauge minimum

steel at 1500o F. Color of writing surface will be No. 100 White Gloss.

2. Backing sheet shall be minimum 0.015 inch thick aluminum sheet. C. Surface shall conform to requirements set forth in "Standards for Architectural Porcelain" by the

Porcelain Institute. D. Basis of Design: LCS3 E. Joints shall have concealed continuous steel splines, or a tongue and groove finished to a smooth

even plane. "H" bars are not acceptable. 2.3 TACKBOARDS / TACKSTRIPS A. See Floor Plans for locations. Tackboards shall be as follows: 1. Series 1, Type "CO". B. Tackboard Material: manufacturer’s standard self healing material. C. Board Construction: Burlap on hardboard; 1/4" thick tackable surface on 1/4" hardboard (1/2"

total thickness). All edges shall be edge wrapped. D. Color shall be selected from Manufacturer's standard finishes. 2.4 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Trim for markerboards and tackboards shall be Manufacturer's standard product. Provide the

following: 1. Chalk tray (at markerboards only), joint splines, end closures and perimeter trim. 2. Trim shall be extrusions of not less than 3/32 inch thick aluminum, for installation

without visible fastenings at full face view; one piece with joints at corners only, no splices.

3. Continuous 2” maprail at top. 4. Continuous box style tray at bottom.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Tackboards shall be surface-mounted with 2 inch clip angle hangers at 24 inch o.c. top and

bottom. B. Grounds shall be continuous, aligned and shimmed to a true place and shall be properly secured to

wall surface. Maximum spacing of fasteners shall be 12 inch maximum o.c. under Markerboard and 20 inch o.c. maximum elsewhere.

C. Clips shall be secured with cadmium-plated sheet metal screws. D. Marker and tackboards shall be set plumb and true, using spotting adhesive applied in spots 12

inch o.c., both horizontally and vertically. E. Mounting heights shall be as indicated on drawings 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean all materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Remove all trash, debris, packaging, and other items associated with the work, and dispose of

legally.


SIGNAGE 101423 - 14/20/2016

SECTION 10 1423 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plaque type panel signs as shown on the drawings. 2. Illuminated panel signs as shown on the drawings. 3. Field-applied, vinyl-character signs. 4. Any code required or inspector requested signage


1. Division 01 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary informational and directional signs.

2. Division 22 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment.

3. Division 23 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment.

4. Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment.

5. Division 26 "Emergency and Exit Lighting" for illuminated, self-luminous, and photoluminescent exit sign units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.

B. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers.

B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers.


SIGNAGE 101423 - 24/20/2016



B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and

layout for each sign at least half size 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 6. Mounting details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. Architect to select from manufacturer’s standard colors.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Panel Signs: Full-size Sample including back plate where indicated on drawings. 2. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs: Full-size Sample of characters on glass 3. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. 4. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in Project.

E. Product Schedule: For panel signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified. Schedule to be submitted to Owner for verification prior to fabrication.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


SIGNAGE 101423 - 34/20/2016

B. Signage shall comply with applicable provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), including but not limited to, the following: 1. 1/32” high raised letters, numerals, and Grade 2 Braille in type, style and sizes as defined in the

ADA standards. 2. Locate on latch side of doors; except at door pairs, locate on nearest adjacent wall. 3. Locate to comply with path of approach and to avoid protruding objects. 4. Comply with finish and contrast requirements for ADA.


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices and electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL SIGNS

A. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. “On Air” Sign – Sandies, Item #MWL-1, MFG #340 ON AIR 2. Illuminated Panel Sign: Red lettering on a black background provides a highly visible warning on

your studio door that microphones are live inside.

a. Power: As indicated on electrical Drawings (120V or 240V) b. Lamps: As indicated on electrical drawings (6S6 or 7C7) c. Dimensions: 10”x5”x3” deep d. Mounting: concealed fasteners per manufacturer’s recommendation

3. Solid-Sheet Sign – Melamine laminate or Matte Acrylic with face and back plate:

a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Best Signs; Best Co; ASI; Andco; Signs & Wonders b. Thickness: 1/8” c. Edge Treatment: standard bevel


SIGNAGE 101423 - 44/20/2016

d. Characters: 1” raised letters, numerals, and braille characters where required on background stock. Sign face shall be unitary construction. With all raised elements integral to the face material and not a separate material applied with an adhesive. Photopolymer chemically etched and blast process fabrication are acceptable.

e. Raised Copy: Provide up to forty (40) characters for letter, up to five (5) characters for numbers. Provide accompanying raised braille.

f. Character Type: Sans-serif type as described in the ADA. g. Finish: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. Through body

color. h. Mounting:

1) Sign face will be attached to a wall mounted sign backer by means of a chemical bond or thin high bond sheet adhesive. No foam tape will be allowed. Wall mounted sign backer will be installed flush to the wall with a minimum of 2 mechanical fasteners, using anchors appropriate for the wall material.

2) Drill and insert appropriate type plugs or expansion anchors into wall substrate. 3) Attach sign backer to wall using countersunk tamperproof screws. Screw heads

shall be flush with sign backer face. 4) Mount so that centerline of sign is 60” above floor surface per ADA requirements.

4. Flatness Tolerance: Sign shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions as indicated on Drawings and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner.

2.2 FIELD-APPLIED, VINYL-CHARACTER SIGNS

A. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Sign: Prespaced characters die cut from 3- to 3.5-mil thick, weather-resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the front for on-site alignment and application.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: The Sign Broker 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings, MEP specifications, and as required by building officials 3. Substrate: As indicated on Drawings 4. Text and Font: As indicated on Drawings, MEP specifications, and as required by building

officials.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead screws and bolts with tamper-

resistant Allen-head slots unless otherwise indicated.

3. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly unless otherwise indicated.


SIGNAGE 101423 - 54/20/2016

b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, and installed in predrilled holes.

4. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other installers into concrete or masonry work.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or

other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work.

Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Shop- and Subsurface-Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to surface. Firmly press film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.


SIGNAGE 101423 - 64/20/2016

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

D. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would

impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls according to the accessibility (ADA) standards.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

D. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs: Clean and dry substrate. Align sign characters in final position before removing release liner. Remove release liner in stages, and apply and firmly press characters into


SIGNAGE 101423 - 74/20/2016

final position. Press from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths. Remove carrier film without disturbing applied vinyl film.

E. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.


SIGNAGE 101423 - 84/20/2016



EDUCATIONAL EQUIPMENT 11 50 00 - 1 4/20/2016

SECTION 11 5000 – EDUCATIONAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide and educational equipment as described below. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of equipment. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location, size, mounting detail, and power and

data outlets. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide cleaning information and operating information for

the O&M Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Interactive whiteboard system and projector 1. SMART Board 885ix3 2. Locations: as shown on the contract documents.

B. TV

1. All televisions to be HDTV with built in wifi and data connectivity. Each TV to have a minimum of (1) VGA connection, (1) HDMI connection, (1) component, and (1) composite video and audio connection. Acceptable manufacturers are: Sony, Samsung, Visio, Sharp, or approved equal. All TVs to be commercial grade. GC to submit product data for each TV showing required features to Architect/Owner for review.

2. Locations: as shown on the contract documents.

C. Converter Box 1. As determined by SmartBoard. Television and morning promanning which is shown on

the existing televisions should able to be viewed on the new Smart Boards. 2.2 TRAINING

B. In Person Training 1. Interactive 8-hr training by the SmartBoard representative and scheduled with PGCPS for

the school’s staff

B. Training Manual 1. Include an outline of the 8-hr training session 2. Include all cut sheets, operation, and maintenance data for each training attendee 3. One digital copy 4. (12) printed and bound hardcopies

C. Field Survey

1. SmartBoard rep to schedule field survey(s) in order to determine which converter box is required to convert programming shown on existing televisions to new SmartBoards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


EDUCATIONAL EQUIPMENT 11 50 00 - 2 4/20/2016

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with all of the manufacturer’s instructions. B. Installation to comply with ADA Standards. C. All power and data cabling to be concealed in the wall – power cords and cabling hanging from

the product to the wall receptacle is not acceptable. Contractor to coordinate with electrical drawings and notify Architect of any discrepancies prior to installation.


Information Technology

Office of Telecommunication Design

Prince George’s County Board of Education

8437 Landover Rd, Room 108

Landover, MD 20785

TELEPHONE: 301-925-2890

FAX: 301-925-2890

GENERAL WIRING SPECIFICATIONS

2013

Short Form

LAN Specifications Only

The following procedures are designed to implement the

policies described by the Maryland State Department of

Education Instructional Technology Unit's Handbook for

Telecommunications Distribution Systems. The handbook was

published in 1998 and was updated in 2002. The handbook

is available from the MSDE for a modest cost.

These specifications apply to all data wiring in Prince

Georges County Public Schools, including, but not limited

to, New Construction, Renovation, Additions, E-Rate, etc.

April 23rd, 2013 Page 1

I. General Installation Specifications for Local Area Networks

Summary:

The intent of the data cabling specification is to provide a complete data network within the scope

of the project. All contractors performing low voltage wiring must currently be an approved Prince

George’s County Public Schools (PGCPS) wiring contractor. The work is to include all new in

OEM boxed material and equipment required to establish a complete, fully operational network.

All infrastructure cabling must be part of an end to end solution complete with manufacturers’

warranties. All routers must be Cisco. All switches must be manufactured by Aruba Networks and

configured to PGCPS standards. All voice and data terminations must be made on patch panels

and must be clearly labeled. All wireless equipment must be Aruba Networks, specified in the

scope of work. All UPSs must be rack mounted APC units with network interface cards (NIC) and

must be configured to PGCPS configuration standards. It is strongly recommended that all

electronics be purchased at the latest possible time in order to insure acquiring the latest

technology. All wiring will be Category 6a or better Plenum rated cable. Each instructional space

will have not less than nine (9) Cat-6a plenum rated cables installed in groups of three. All other

spaces will have cables as specified in the scope of work provided by the Office of

Telecommunications Design (OTD). In all cases wiring must conform to these specifications as

well as the "Standards for Telecommunications Distribution Systems" as published by the

Maryland State Department of Education Instructional Technology Unit.

In the event that there is no clear specification provided or if there are any deviations from

the above, clarification and clearance to proceed must be acquired from the OTD at 301-

925-2890.

A. Main services for TV/DATA/VOICE coming into the building from the street, should be housed

in 4 inch rigid conduits, from the street to the MDF of the building, and should be terminated either

on the wall or in the appropriate rack.

B. Installation of low voltage cables shall comply with Articles 725, 800, 810 and the following

listed articles of the National Electrical Code and articles EIA/TIA 568A (Commercial Building

Telecommunications Standards), EIA/TIA 569 (Pathways & Spaces Standards), EIA/TIA 606

(Administration Standards), EIA/TIA 607 (Grounding & Bonding Standards), and local, city, the

State of Maryland and Prince George’s County laws and regulations. Additionally, all projects

must comply with the "Standards for Telecommunications Distribution Systems" as published by

the Maryland State Department of Education Instructional Technology Unit.

C. All service and patch cables, unless otherwise specified, will be Four Pair Category 6a Plenum

Rated Cable, blue in color. Voice cables must be gray in color. Wireless cables must be green in

color. Security Systems must be white in color. All cables should be General, Hitachi, Leviton,

Belden, or equivalent quality or better, as approved by PGCPS.

D. No service cable is to exceed 90 meters.

E. Multiple wiring closets within one installation must be connected directly to a designated main


distribution facility (MDF), in a star topology, via fiber optic cable. Fiber optic cable runs must

have a Category 6a cable as specified in item 'C' pulled parallel with the fiber for redundancy

regardless of the length of the run. Main closets in new construction or renovations must provide

for two to four, 110 volt 30 ampere L30R electrical outlets, each on dedicated circuits. Refer to

sample elevation and electrical drawings at the end of this section.

F. Multi-mode Fiber optic horizontal cables must be blue in color and consist of 12 strands of

multi-mode, plenum rated, 50 micron, OM4, laser certified fiber that is capable of supporting

10Ge data rates up to 550 meters. If the distance is over 550 meters, single mode fiber must be

used. Fiber must be terminated in a rack mount cable box using LC style connectors, and must

follow all low voltage cable installation rules as specified elsewhere in this contract document.

Single-mode fiber optic cables must be yellow in color and consist of 12 stands of single-mode,

plenum rated, 9 micron, laser certified fiber that is capable of supporting 100Ge for up to a

minimum of 40km. Single-mode fiber cable must be installed and terminated in the MDF as

mentioned in item “A”. All fiber pulled throughout the building must be run in 1 ¼ inch plenum

rated, appropriately colored, (yellow for single-mode, orange for multi-mode) innerduct.

Furthermore, terminated fiber bulk heads must be labeled accordingly.

G. All cables should be terminated with appropriate Category 6a equipment in the closet and at

the user’s station. RJ-45 Category 6a Patch panels (Hubbell, Leviton, Belden or equivalent or

better quality approved by PGCPS) are required in all closets. Single source end to end solutions

are required with a manufacturer's warranty of at least fifteen (15) years.

H. Individual drops in each instructional space must be placed as far away from each other as

possible to allow maximum flexibility for future room use.

I. Each data drop is defined as three (3) Category 6a cables. Each instructional space must have a

minimum of three, 3 cable drops.

J. All drops must be within six feet of an operating electrical outlet, as far from water (sinks,

bathrooms, etc.) as possible, as far from outside doors as possible and approximately 18 to 24

inches from the floor.

K. Drops cannot be placed on movable, removable, sliding walls, or on furniture.

L. Connectivity between all drops and closets must be confirmed by the contractor for links to be

considered complete. All cable runs must be tested individually using an industry standard

Category 6a scanning tester. Fiber and A/V cables should also be tested accordingly. Test results

are to be provided on paper and electronically (CAD) along with “as built” diagrams to the OTD.

All cables must be labeled at the drop and the patch panel. Fiber ties must be labeled on the fiber

patch cables themselves as well as the fiber cans. All network racks must be labeled as well.

M. Electronic installations will connect incoming high speed digital circuits to a router, typically

with a standard RJ45 Category 6a patch cord of the appropriate length, or with a single mode fiber

GBIC, at the proper 1Ge or 10Ge speed, into the main router.


N. The MDF must contain a router which is to be a Cisco 3750G layer 3 switch, 10/100/1000

with a minimum of 2, 10Ge fiber ports for uplinks for the WAN and LAN. The Router is to also

include IP OSPF routing software.

O. Connect the router to an approved 10Ge managed fiber switch (Aruba 24 port 10Ge SFP+ Fiber

switch) with a LC to LC fiber patch cord of the appropriate length. A 10Ge SFP+ uplink will be

required by the scope of work for any individual job.

P. The Primary switch in the stack of an IDF must be an Aruba S3500-48P or most current model,

and must be linked back to the MDF at 10Ge via fiber backbone. A Special module tray and SFP+

will be required to provide this connection, along with the appropriate length patch cord.

Q. Connect each approved 10/100/1000 managed switch (must be Aruba S2500-48P or most

current model) in the stack to the primary switch in the stack with the appropriate 10Ge SFP+

stacking cables, in a braided fashion. There are to be no more than 8 switches in one complete

stack.

R. Use fiber optic 50 micron patch cables, blue in color, to connect remote closets to the main

closet to create a collapsed fiber optic backbone. The use of a fiber SFP+ installed internally in the

switch is preferred and may require use of LC to LC 50 micron patch cords. The fiber backbone

will consist of home run fiber (as described in paragraph “E” and “F”) operating at 10Ge. This will

require the use of 10Ge connections in the IDF and a 10Ge fiber switch /switches in the MDF. The

switch stack in the MDF must be connected to the 10Ge fiber switch/switches as well.

S. All closets must have a suitably sized (15 minutes) APC UPS, with an installed and configured

network interface card, that is connected to the switch stack with the appropriate copper patch

cable. All equipment must be connected to the UPS and powered. Vendor must supply any needed

(rack mounted) power strips.

T. PGCPS requires the use of Polycom Soundpoint Voice Over IP telephones. These telephones

must be purchased, configured, and installed by an approved PGCPS vendor. These telephones

must be powered by POE switches (Aruba S3500-48P or Aruba S2500-48P). Voice cables must

be clearly patched with the appropriate 1 ft copper patch cable, gray in color in the wiring closets.

Each instructional space and office requires a VOIP telephone. Each telephone type will vary

depending on type of use. All Classroom and Instructional spaces require a Polycom Soundpoint

IP 331 or most current or better, All mid office, conference rooms, work rooms, etc… require a

Polycom Soundpoint IP 560 or most current or better, and all main administrative offices require

a Polycom Soundpoint IP 670 or most current or better with the equivalent color expansion

module. A gray patch cable of the appropriate length, must be supplied to connect each telephone

at the users work space. Please see the most current PGCPS Telephone specification for further

details.

U. Closet installations will use properly secured wall or floor mounted racks containing all patch

panels and electronic equipment. Cables must be in ladder racks for a more secure and cleaner

installation.


V. Industry standard wire management in each closet must be provided and installed by the

vendor. 1 ft. patch cables must be used between patch panels and switches. 10Ge stacking cables

must be used between switches in a braided fashion.

W. All low voltage cables must be installed and secured in a neat, orderly, and code compliant

manner. (NEC, Article 110-12). The Contractor is to furnish and install all conduit, sleeves, wire-

mold, cable trays, wire ties, Velcro (for patch cables), ladder racks, etc. required to support and

protect said wiring in a code compliant fashion.

X. All cables must be protected against physical damage. (NEC, Article 300-14).

Y. No low voltage cables are to be supported by other electrical raceway-conduit systems, conduit

systems of other trades, ductwork, sprinkler piping, etc. (NEC, Article 300-11). Low voltage cables

must not be permitted to lie on the grid system of any type ceiling system.

Z. All low voltage cables shall be individually identified every 20 to 30 feet by an approved and

easily readable means such as string type name tags, etc. to identify what type of systems the cables

are used for.

AA. The outlet box for each network outlet connection must be identified with the unique

number(s) assigned that cable for the facility being wired according to a numbering scheme agreed

to by PGCPS and the Contractor. The other end of each cable that has been terminated in an outlet

box will be clearly and permanently marked on the RJ-45 patch panel to which the network cable

will be attached. The unique number assigned to this cable will be clearly marked on the riser

diagram described above, and the wire itself will be clearly marked with a wraparound labeled

piece of tape on the cable inside the terminating outlet box and within two feet of that cable’s

termination at an RJ-45 patch panel.

AB. No splices of any type are permitted in Category 6a Wire or Fiber Optic Cable. If other types

of lines such as public address, video, or telephone wires require splicing only crimp type wire

connectors shall be used for open unprotected splices, such as Scotch Lock connectors made by

3M Company or approved equal. Standard screw on type wire nuts will not be accepted. Where

low voltage cables other than Category 6a Wire or Fiber Optic Cable as specified above, should

require splicing above accessible ceiling areas, the cables shall be laid side by side and supported

to the building structure approximately 6 to 8 inches behind the splice to prevent any strain from

being applied to the splice device and conductors. NOTE: Wire nut type screw-on connectors can

be used in approved electrical box for high voltage applications with approved connectors.

AC. All low voltage and fiber optic cables shall be supported and strapped in an approved manner.

The spacing of these supports must be from 4-1/2 to 8 feet depending on job conditions and code

requirements. These supports must be installed to provide adequate support and to prevent excess

sagging of these cables.

AD. If low voltage cables are installed through a ceiling space system that is used for

environmental air and or a return air system, the cables must be labeled “PLENUM OR

ENVIRONMENTAL AIR TYPE”.


AE. If class two and class three cables are installed in a cable tray they must be type PLTC (Power

Limited Tray Cable). (NEC, Art. 725-38).

AF. Low voltage cables must be installed/run with the building structure, such as along metal

beams, through open web type metal beams and over or below solid metal beams as job conditions

permit. If no building structure as mentioned above is available then some type of approved

supporting system shall be installed to support the cable(s). When low voltage cables are installed

over, through or below any type of metal beams that have rough surfaces or sharp edges the cables

shall not rest on or be secured to these surfaces. For example, open web type metal beams with

rough surfaces or sharp edges, support the cable(s) with plastic ties from the round or smooth sided

steel cross braces or by other approved means. Also do not strap or let low voltage cables rest on

all thread rods. When bends, turns, and splices are made in cable runs allow sufficient slack in the

cables at these points and adequately support at these points. (NEC, Article 300-14).

AG. Open, exposed low voltage cables must be installed so that they are a minimum 2 inches away

from all electrical power conduits and conductors. (NEC, Article 725-38-al).

AH. Low voltage cables must not lay on or be supported by metal duct systems, metal plumbing

pipes, sprinkler pipes or other metal-structural surfaces that could cause the cable to be damaged

if excessive strain-pressure was put upon the cables.

AI. When low voltage cables are run through solid walls, a conduit sleeve shall be installed for the

cables to pass through. This conduit sleeve shall have either insulated throat connectors, insuliners

or bushings installed on both ends of the sleeve. Where a conduit sleeve or other through-

penetration device is installed through a fire rated assembly, the opening around the sleeve and the

hole through the sleeve shall be sealed with an Underwriters Laboratory approved fire rated sealant

material after the cables have been installed. Conduits must be sized appropriately for the amount

of cable being pulled through.

AJ. All wiring closets will be supplied with 19" rack(s) capable of supporting specified and needed

electronic equipment. Where such racks are not already available, a ¾ inch thick plywood panel

can be installed in each wiring closet that is adequate for the mounting of wall mount racks, patch

panels and any other specified and necessary electronic equipment that is normally attached to the

wall and not placed on a rack. An example of such equipment, but not limited to such equipment,

is a POTS patch panel. All wall or floor mount racks shall be grounded with a 4 gauge copper

cable.

AK. The installation will be implemented without exception according to this contract or on the

drawings that specify quantities and types of material, necessary devices, and specifies whether

these items are to be provided by the contractor or by PGCPS.

AL. When materials are provided by PGCPS, the contractor must take shipment of the said

materials at a location specified by PGCPS.

AM. The Contractor must provide and install patch cords for all closet connections using 1 foot

patch cables (Blue for data, Gray, for voice, Green for wireless, White for Security Sytems). In


addition the contractor must provide one additional 15 foot patch cord for each port in each closet,

gray and blue accordingly.

AN. Hardware, patch panels, and all local area network electronic support equipment, shall be

mounted in a wall mounted or floor standing rack.

AO. All installed electronic equipment must be configured according to the PGCPS office of

Technology Operations specification. All electronic equipment installed must be accounted for

and tagged with the appropriate PGCPS asset tag to be entered into the PGCPS Asset Management

Systems. Documentation for all electronic equipment must be provided upon completion of the

project. Documentation will conform to the Office of Telecommunication Design standards and

will include information such as exact equipment location, mac address, IP address, closet name,

serial number, part number, complete network diagram and wiring schematic, etc… etc…. etc…

Please coordinate with the OTD to provide this said documentation. No exceptions. Contractor

must have a Network engineer on board to perform these tasks.

II. Installation Specifications for Technology Support

Every instructional space must be provided with the infrastructure to support most instructional

technology devices such as projectors, digital television tuners, audio enhancement, digital

visualizers, interactive white boards, apple TV’s, etc. The required infrastructure provided will

allow all of these electronic devices to work seamlessly together.

Teacher Station Requirements

A. Each instructional space must include a teacher station. A teacher station is composed of the

following connectors with appropriate length cables:

-3 CAT 6a data jacks, blue in color, that terminate in the nearest cable distribution facility

-1 VGA connection that ties to the projector station

-1 3.5mm Audio Jack that ties to the Audio station splitting to RCA left and right Audio

-1 USB B-A connection that ties to the projector station

-1 HDMI connection to the projector station

These cables should be terminated in an appropriate “all in one” 2 gang box with 2, 2 inch

conduits that run above ceiling tiles.

B. Teacher stations cannot be placed on moveable or sliding walls or on furniture and must be

on the wall four to six feet to the left or right of interactive white board installation, or white

board near an electrical outlet and 18 inches from the ground.

C. The appropriate cables must tie back to a projector station or audio station within a cabinet or

to a projector station wall mounted above interactive white board to accommodate for a wall

mounted short throw projector. In cases where cables cannot be fished through walls or ceiling


tiles, appropriate cable trays/conduit/wire mold must be used to hide all cable runs.

D. Appropriate gendered patch cords as represented in the sample drawings at the end of this

section must be provided at each teacher station, for the user to connect their devices.

E. All connectors, cables, plates and necessary materials must be manufactured by Hubbell,

Levington, Rapid Run, Belden, or equivalent.

Audio Station Requirements

A. Each instructional space must include an audio station. An audio station is composed of the

following connectors with the appropriate length cables:

-2 CAT 6a data jacks, blue in color, that terminate in the nearest cable distribution facility

-1 yellow composite connection that ties to the projector station

-1 left and right Audio Jack that ties to the teacher station condensing to a single 3.5mm jack

-2 COAX F-connectors, one tying to the main CCTV system, and one tying to the projector

station

-1 HDMI connection to the projector station



B. Audio stations cannot be placed on moveable or sliding walls or on furniture and must be on

a wall either directly above the teacher station with a mounted shelf, or on the wall behind some

sort of audio cabinet.

C. The appropriate cables must tie back to a teacher station wall mounted near the teacher’s

desk and electrical outlet, or to a projector station wall mounted above interactive white board

to accommodate for a wall mounted short throw projector. In cases where cables cannot be

fished through walls or ceiling tiles, appropriate cable trays/conduit/wire mold must be used to

hide all cable runs.




Levington, Rapid Run, Belden, or equivalent quality.

Projector Station Requirements


A. Each instructional space must include a projector station. A projector station is composed of

the following connectors with the appropriate length cables:

-1 CAT 6a data jacks, blue in color, that terminates in the nearest cable distribution facility

-1 yellow composite connection that ties to the audio station

-1 USB A-B that ties back to the teacher station

-1 COAX F-connectors that ties back to the audio station

-2 HDMI connections, 1 tying back to the audio station, and one tying back to the teacher

station.

-1 VGA connection that ties back to the teacher station.



B. In cases where cables cannot be fished through walls or ceiling tiles, appropriate cable

trays/conduit/wire mold must be used to hide all cable runs.

C. Interactive white boards will be provided by PGCPS. Contractors are urged to install these

devices in order to fulfill the warranty of the defined infrastructure.




Levington, Rapid Run, Belden, or equivalent quality.

III. Wireless Network Requirements

A. All wiring projects for Prince George’s County projects must include wireless

communication for laptops, mobile devices, etc. A wireless survey must be conducted prior to

construction. This survey will indicate where additional data drops must be installed for

wireless access points in order to support seamless, building wide, all inclusive wireless data

communications, and what type of Aruba Networks controller is needed. Cat 6a drops must be

calculated and installed in addition to any existing data drops as may be indicated by the survey.

The survey and any supporting documentation shall be provided. Please coordinate with OTD

for documentation requirements.

B. Following installation and before acceptance of any wireless system an additional wireless

survey must be conducted. This survey must confirm complete building wide wireless service.

Any areas failing to properly support wireless communication must be provided with additional


data drops and equipment to bring an area into compliance. The survey and any supporting

documentation shall be provided to the OTD.

C. Access points must be ceiling mounted or wall mounted high, above tiles and in concealed

places with the antennae pointing in the down direction.

D. Data drops must be labeled at the drop and at the patch panel at the appropriate closet.

E. Concealed access points can be marked with some type of specific tag on the ceiling tile to

identify the location of the access point.

F. The telecommunications department requires that Aruba Networks equipment be used for an

entire building installation. Aruba technology consists of a central controller (3400 or better)

equipped with a fully functional firewall paired with Aruba AP-225/224 Qualified 802.11ac thin

access points.

G. Each access point will require a two cable Cat 6a drop not to exceed 300ft (90 meters) from a

wiring closet. Two cables at each drop are required for redundancy or for future expansion.

Cables must be green in color.

H. Aruba access points require power via PoE (power over Ethernet). A PoE switch (Aruba

S3500-48P or Aruba S2500-48P) will be required in the appropriate wiring closet, which will

supply power to the access points. The switch will be clearly labeled for Power and WIFI at the

patch panel along with location of the access point. All cables for each wireless access location

must be terminated on their own unique patch panel in the wiring closet. If this is a small

installation and cost is an issue, power injectors can be purchased through Aruba instead of a

PoE switch. Power outlets must be installed near the data outlets for power redundancy.

I. Each instructional space must have an installed Aruba AP-225/224 Qualified 802.11ac Access

point or most current to accommodate for client/user density rather than just radio coverage.

Larger rooms such as lecture halls, conference rooms, auditoriums, cafeterias, general office

areas, gyms, etc… may require the installation of multiple access points.

J. Installation and configuration must be well documented. As-builts will be required with

layout, make, model, s/n, MAC address etc. The contractor must provide an engineer on staff to

coordinate documentation and configuration with the PGCPS OTD.

Due to the volatility of the technology, electronic equipment required by this section will be bid to

the Board's most current specifications immediately prior to the required installation date for the

material.

Advancing technology convergence requires that the data specifications enumerated above must

be carefully considered along with: the relevant EdSpec, Video specifications, Audio

specifications, Television specifications, Public Address specifications, Security specifications,

Fire annunciator and any other low voltage application.


Au

dio

Sta

tio

n

CO

AX

F-C

on

ne

cto

r to

CC

TV

Syte

m

RC

A L

eft

an

d R

ight

fro

m T

ea

ch

er

Sta

tio

n

HD

MI

to P

roje

cto

r S

tatio

n

CO

AX

F-C

on

ne

cto

r to

Pro

jecto

r S

tation

2 C

AT

6a

to

MD

F/ID

F

Com

po

site t

o P

roje

cto

r S

tatio

n


Electrical Requirements for Elementary Schools


Electrical Requirements for Middle School/Elementary School


Electrical Requirements for Middle School


Electrical Requirements for High School